Knx система домашней автоматизации by Anton V

BUILDING AUTOMATION

BUILDING

AUTOMATION BUILDING AUTOMATION

BUILDING AUTOMATION

Specialist catalogue

Vimar group: positive energy for highly developed systems. Products, systems and solutions to control electrical energy, safety and communication: Vimar group does this and much more, ensuring continual improvement for every lifestyle. All of which is made in Italy to combine design and technology in terms of complete reliability and well-being. A range of residential series offering a wide variety of combinations in terms of design, materials and types of controls; Home Automation and Building Automation systems; numerous solutions for smart and secure management of video door entry, CCTV and automated access devices. This is what the Vimar group offers. An offering that reflects a long history built on tradition, expertise, commitment and passion for a chosen line of work.

Vimar Group. MADE IN ITALY The five The heart of the company where we devise, design and points of produce products - is still located in the north-east of excellence. Italy, because we believe in the Made in Italy in all its forms. Our products are inspired by a truly unique combination of high quality aesthetics and reliable technology. From materials and design to electronic processing, we distinguish ourselves through a renowned style that speaks our language throughout the world.

HIGH QUALITY

We believe that the quality of our products is their best calling card, and this is why we test our products one by one. We are proud of our ownership of the most important quality certifications to UNI EN ISO 9001:2008; our environmental management system is certified to the UNI EN ISO 14001:2004 standard, without forgetting health and safety, with our work environment certified to the BS OHSAS 18001:2007 standards.

RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT

ENVIRONMENT

WE IMPLEMENT IDEAS

We invest 6% of our annual turnover in Research and Development, to ensure we always offer the very best in terms of technology and design. Over the years we have registered over 150 patents around the world that testify to the equal attention we devote to major innovation and the smaller details that guarantee the safety of simple everyday actions.

The correct waste material separation ensures the product designed at the outset of being totally dismantled and recycled at the end of its life. Thanks to the water based and UV-cross linked painting we reduce atmospheric emissions of VOCs (Volatile Organic Compounds) lower than the limits set out by the strictest European standards and galvanic bath treatment is replaced with the innovative and greener MSD (Magnetron Sputtering Deposition) treatment. The packaging is made of recycled materials and printed with water-based inks with no harmful substances and with ecological glues.

We have given shape and life to ideas in order to ensure continual improvement in every lifestyle. Today, for the all-round management of electrical systems, we have a complete range of products: wiring devices, home & building automation systems, video door entry and CCTV and gate automation systems, plugs, socket outlets and accessories. Over 9,000 items in the catalogue that combine aesthetic quality, technological reliability and ease of installation to bring them home to all our customers.

The universe of Vimar group solutions. For large or small residential, commercial buildings or hospitality facilities, clinics or yachts, we have developed solutions that dialogue with each other, while maintaining their own specificity: technologically advanced

Wiring devices

Eikon

Arké

AESTHETIC AND FUNCTIONAL S

OLUTI O

Plana

Home automation

YSTEM HOME AUTOMATION S

functions and systems, which are explained in dedicated catalogues, complement each other with perfect aesthetic coordination to manage any building in the best way possible.

M AUTO

Y ATION S

STEMS

Building automation

Video door entry Automation CCTV systems SO L UTION

S FOR A CCESS AND VIDEO CONTROL

Solutions for conventional systems

CONTROLS

A useful summary table to guide you through the solutions for conventional systems. A wide range of functions for any installation requirement, spelled out in a series of preferential applications. Whatever your need Vimar Group always offers the best solution.

SOUND SYSTEM

A complete sound system, compatible with MP3 players, iPod and iPhone too, it can be installed in conventional systems.

SMALL RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS

(Small and medium-sized residential units, semi-detached houses and apartments)

LARGE RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS

(Large residential units, detached houses and lofts)

COMMERCIAL BUILDINGS

(Small and medium-sized commercial units, shops and offices)

HOTEL BUILDINGS

(Small and medium-sized hotel units, B&Bs, hotels, etc.)

(Small and medium-sized school units, infant schools, elementary schools, etc.)

HEALTH CARE FACILITIES

SHIPS AND YACHTS

(Small boats, ships and yachts)

For any aesthetic and functional need: touch, axial, rocker, infrared, and radio-frequency.

1. CONTROLS

Solutions for thermoregulation and energy management: thermostats and time-thermostats to manage remotely the temperature of the house and view consumption for energy savings.

VIDEO DOOR ENTRY

PLUGS AND SOCKETS

Transponder and smart card readers to control entry and restrict access to certain rooms.

Preferential applications.

SCHOOL BUILDINGS

ACCESS CONTROL

TEMPERATURE AND ENERGY MANAGEMENT

A complete system of plugs, socket outlets multiple sockets for simple and professional purposes, adaptors, extension cords and cable reels.

2. TEMPERATURE AND ENERGY MANAGEMENT

3. LIGHTING

Solutions for video door entry system with a wide range of indoor units, entrance panels and controls for landing calls, to suit any building and simplify communication.

4. EMERGENCY LIGHTING

5. POWER AND SIGNAL SOCKET OUTLETS

LIGHTING

EMERGENCY LIGHTING

POWER AND SIGNAL SOCKET OUTLETS

Control devices for every type of source (halogen, CFL, LED) and for managing flush-mounted RGB lamps.

Emergency LED lighting devices with 1 or 3 modules, can be flush mounted, necessary in a black-out or as step lights.

Devices to provide energy, from Italian and international standard power socket outlets, with SICURY protective shutter, to the power supply unit with USB socket.

CCTV

GATE AUTOMATION

NETSAFE STRUCTURED CABLING

ANTIBACTERIAL DEVICES

Solutions for video surveillance: cameras with analog, analog PRO, HD-SDI and IP technologies, DVR, NVR video recorders and accessories.

Specific solutions guaranteed to manage any access and control sliding gates, swing gates, garage doors, doors and windows and barriers.

Socket outlets, connectors and devices for transmitting data, videos and images inside and outside the building.

Controls, socket outlets and cover plates with antibacterial treatment to ensure the utmost hygiene in public facilities.

6. SOUND SYSTEM

7. ACCESS CONTROL

8. PLUGS AND SOCKETS

9. VIDEO DOOR ENTRY

10. CCTV

11. GATE AUTOMATION

12. STRUCTURED CABLING

13. ANTIBACTERIAL DEVICES

Automation solutions for the home and small business sectors. The By-me home automation system offers four areas of application with a wide range of functions and can be deployed alongside other specific systems, giving added value to your project. See the summary table to check the versatility of our home automation solutions.

CONTROL

Sophisticated technology that controls all the functions of the dwelling both centrally by a single control device and room by room via local devices, over the Internet with PCs, tablets and smartphones of the latest generation.

COMFORT

ENERGY EFFICIENCY

Lighting, scenarios, sound system, moving curtains or roller shutters: each room in the home is an oasis of well-being where you can find the comfortable conditions you prefer.

Temperature control, management of energy consumptions, water and gas are optimized with innovative technology that optimizes energy efficiency, reducing waste.

Preferential applications.

(Small and medium-sized residential units, semi-detached houses and apartments)

COMMERCIAL BUILDINGS

(Small and medium-sized commercial units: offices, shops, etc.)

HOTEL BUILDINGS

(Small and medium-sized hotel units: hotels, B&Bs, etc.)

PUBLIC BUILDINGS

(Small and medium-sized school units: infant schools, elementary schools, churches, gymnasiums, etc.)

HEALTH CARE FACILITIES

(Small and medium-sized health care units: nursing homes, convalescent homes, etc.)

SHIPS AND YACHTS (Small boats)

Total protection guaranteed on the outside by burglar alarm system, video surveillance, access control and video door entry systems and on the inside by sensors that detect and promptly report any gas leaks or flooding.

BY-ME CONTROL

RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS

SECURITY/ SAFETY

COMFORT

ENERGY EFFICIENCY

SECURITY/SAFETY

VIDEO DOOR ENTRY

CCTV

Solutions for video door entry system with a wide range of indoor units, entrance panels and controls for landing calls, to suit any building and simplify communication.

Solutions for video surveillance: cameras with analog, analog PRO, HD-SDI and IP technologies, DVR, NVR video recorders and accessories.

VIDEO DOOR ENTRY

CCTV

GATE AUTOMATION

STRUCTURED CABLING

Specific solutions guaranteed to manage any access and control sliding gates, swing gates, garage doors, doors and windows and barriers.

Socket outlets, connectors and devices for transmitting data, videos and images inside and outside the building.

GATE AUTOMATION

NETSAFE

Solutions for the building trade and large residential structures. The Well-contact Plus system — developed to KNX standard to communicate with the other systems in the building — offers four areas of application with a wide range of functions and can be deployed alongside other systems to cover every practical need.

CONTROL

A wide range of products for controlling and supervising scenarios, lights and roller shutters in single rooms or in the entire building.

COMFORT

ENERGY EFFICIENCY

SECURITY/SAFETY

Solutions that guarantee well-being in all the rooms in the facility: lights, automation systems and temperature are controlled with simplicity and tailored to suit the preferences of guests.

The system allows intelligent management of energy use in the facility: for example, by switching on lights and activating temperature control only where and when necessary, according to the number of guests in the rooms or the required lighting levels.

The security and safety of rooms is important: access control also covers situations where entry is subject to payment of admission charges.

Preferential applications.

WELL-CONTACT PLUS CONTROL

LARGE RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS

(Large residential units, detached houses and lofts)

COMMERCIAL BUILDINGS (Large commercial units: shopping malls, business centres, etc.)

HOTEL BUILDINGS (Large hotel units: hotels, etc.)

PUBLIC BUILDINGS

(Large school units: high schools, universities, churches, gymnasiums, etc.)

HEALTH CARE FACILITIES (Large health care units: hospitals, clinics, etc.)

SHIPS AND YACHTS (Ships and yachts)

COMFORT

ENERGY EFFICIENCY

SECURITY/SAFETY

Use the summary table to find your type of project and you will see that the Vimar offering is truly comprehensive, covering large residential and commercial buildings, and hospitality or healthcare facilities of whatever size.

VIDEO DOOR ENTRY

CCTV

GATE AUTOMATION

NETSAFE STRUCTURED CABLING

CALL-WAY EMERGENCY CALLS

Solutions for video door entry system with a wide range of indoor units, entrance panels and controls for landing calls, to suit any building and simplify communication.

Solutions for video surveillance: cameras with analog, analog PRO, HD-SDI and IP technologies, DVR, NVR video recorders and accessories.

Specific solutions guaranteed to manage any access and control sliding gates, swing gates, garage doors, doors and windows and barriers.

Socket outlets, connectors and devices for transmitting data, videos and images inside and outside the building.

Emergency call devices for alerting healthcare staff and monitoring patients, controls, socket outlets and cover plates all finished with antibacterial treatment.

VIDEO DOOR ENTRY

CCTV

GATE AUTOMATION

NETSAFE

CALL-WAY

BUILDING AUTOMATION

Contents

CALL-WAY

from page 112

NETSAFE

from page 182

CALL-WAY

from page 14

NETSAFE

WELL-CONTACT PLUS

BUILDING AUTOMATION

The building automation system for control, comfort, efficiency and security/safety of buildings. From lighting to access control, from monitoring consumption to dialogue with other devices already in the structure, it can all be managed via Well-contact Plus. A unique system developed on the KNX standard that enables programming, coordinating and supervising all the functions in the building whether it be an office, hotel, shop or gym.

CONTROL

COMFORT

EFFICIENCY

SECURITY/SAFETY

Optimized management. Control and comfort are guaranteed with Well-contact Plus. The system enables centralized management of any structure. Raising and lowering curtains or roller shutters, setting the climate, dosing the lighting, controlling access, but also viewing the images of CCTV cameras. All from a single point.

Control.

total supervision WELL-CONTACT SUITE. Five different applications, differentiated by the intended use and size of the property, that enable managing and controlling all the devices in the system.

room control FULL FLAT TOUCH SCREEN.

Supervising a room or the entire system via stylish devices featuring intuitive icons.

global monitoring

room control

automation systems

lighting

Comfort.

automation systems

lighting

KNX DEVICES FOR AUTOMATION SYSTEMS.

KNX DEVICES FOR LIGHT CONTROL.

Used for raising / lowering the roller shutters. They are equipped with RGB LEDs with predefined symbols, chosen from a large library.

Equipped with 4 independent buttons that can be customised with icons indicating their function.

Full efficiency and security. These systems are totally integrated which provides real benefits, avoiding unnecessary waste and increasing well-being. The climate can be centrally controlled and can be switched on or off according to whether people are present or windows open. Security is guaranteed by the transponder card readers that permit access to certain areas or rooms only to authorized persons and by the video surveillance system, capable of monitoring the entire structure.

Energy efficiency.

energy management

climate control

IR PRESENCE DETECTOR.

TOUCH THERMOSTAT.

Enables switching on lights only when someone is actually present, a perfect combination of functionality and energy saving.

Controls room temperature to assure made-to-measure comfort. Its status can be managed and supervised from reception.

energy management

climate control

Inputs

video surveillance

Safety and security.

accesses

video surveillance

TRANSPONDER READER.

MULTIMEDIA VIDEO TOUCH SCREEN.

Simply bring the card near to open the electrical lock and turn on the courtesy lights. The reader provides access to different rooms only for authorized persons, ideal for hotels and accommodation facilities.

Through integration with the CCTV systems it provides a perfect, high-definition picture of what is happening inside and outside the building. 19

WELL-CONTACT PLUS

Catalogue section

SELECTION GUIDE

from page 22

GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS

from page 26

CONTROL AND SUPERVISION

from page 32

ACCESS CONTROL

from page 62

TEMPERATURE CONTROL

from page 70

SYSTEM COMPONENTS

from page 76

WELL-CONTACT SUITE SOFTWARE

from page 96

INSTALLATION EXAMPLES

from page 100

WELL-CONTACT PLUS

WELL-CONTACT PLUS Selection guide Control and supervision Description

Code Eikon

10” multimedia IP video touch screen, Due Fili Plus video door entry indoor station and web-server based home automation system supervisor, complete with mounting frame for installation on box V71318

21553.1

Eikon 4,3” Full Flat colour touch screen for control, Well-contact Plus, 1 input for temperature sensor, complete with support for installation in 8-module box

Full Flat colour touch screen for control, Well-contact Plus, 1 input for temperature sensor, 3 modules

Arké

21848 grey

21848.B white

21848.BN neutral

21849.1 grey

21849.1.B white

21849.1.BN neutral

Eikon 4,3” colour touch screen for control, Well-contact Plus, 1 input for temperature sensor, complete with support for installation in 8-module box

Full Flat colour touch screen for control and command, Well-contact Plus, 1 input for temperature sensor 3 modules

Monochrome touch screen for local control, Well-contact Plus - 3 modules

Plana

Arké

∆ 20848.1 grey

∆ 20848.1.B white

∆ 21849 grey

∆ 21849.BN neutral

∆ 20849 grey

∆ 20849.B white

Idea

∆ 20848.1.N Next

∆ 19848.1 grey

∆ 19848.1.B white

∆ 20849.N Next

∆ 19849 grey

∆ 19849.B white

16849 grey

Plana

16849.B white

∆ 14848.1 white

∆ 14848.1.SL Silver

∆ 14849 white

∆ 14849.SL Silver

Eikon Tactil Control with 4 independent buttons for managing single loads or scenarios, KNX standard, to be completed with a label and Eikon Tactil cover plate - 2 modules

21840

Control with 6 independent buttons for managing single loads or scenarios, KNX standard, to be completed with a label and Eikon Tactil cover plate - 3 modules

21860

Control with 4 independent buttons KNX standard, visible in darkness, to be completed with button - 2 modules

Eikon

Arké

Idea

Plana

20840 grey

19840 grey

16840 grey

16840.B white

14840 white

16850 grey

16850.B white

14850 white

Passive infrared presence detector, KNX standard - 2 modules 20850 grey

Eikon Web server for local and remote supervision of the KNX system, installation on DIN rails (60715 TH35), occupies 8 modules size 17.5 mm

20850.B white

20850.N Next

19850 grey

Arké

19850.B white

Idea

01545

Plana

14850.SL Silver

WELL-CONTACT PLUS Selection guide Access control Description

Code Eikon Tactil

21457

Eikon

Arké

Idea

Plana

Transponder card reader for installation outside the room, KNX standard, 2 relay outputs NO 4 A 24 V~ 2 inputs, power supply 12-24 V~ 50/60 Hz and 12-24 Vdc (SELV) 20457 - 3 modules. grey Supplied without transponder card

20457.B white

20457.N Next

19457 grey

19457.B white

16927 grey

16927.B white

14457 white

14457.SL Silver

Transponder card reader with vertical pocket for installation inside the room, KNX standard, 2 relay outputs NO 4 A 24 V~, 2 inputs, additional power supply 12-24 V~ 50/60 Hz and 12-24 Vdc 20453 (SELV) - 3 modules grey

20453.B white

20453.N Next

19453 grey

19453.B white

16923 grey

16923.B white

14453 white

14453.SL Silver

20450.B white

20450.N Next

19450 grey

19450.B white

16920 grey

16920.B white

14450 white

14450.SL Silver

Transponder card reader/programmer with vertical pocket, with build-in table mounting box - 4 modules

20450 grey

WELL-CONTACT PLUS

Transponder card reader for installation outside the room, KNX standard, 2 relay outputs NO 4 A 24 V~, 2 inputs, power supply 12-24 V~ 50/60 Hz and 12-24 Vdc (SELV), to be completed with Eikon Tactil transponder cover plate - 3 modules. Supplied without transponder card

Transponder card for programmable readers, customizable back 01598

Temperature control Description

Code Eikon

Arké

Touch electronic thermostat for ambient temperature control of 2 independent zones (heating and air-conditioning), KNX standard home automation, RGB LED backlighting - 2 modules

02952.B 02952 2 modules 2 modules

Eikon Electronic thermostat for ambient air temperature control (heating/air-conditioning) of 2 independent zones, KNX standard, 1 NO relay output 4 A 24 V~, 1 input for temperature sensor, 1 programmable digital input - 2 modules

Plana

Arké

Idea

∆ 20430 grey

∆ 20430.B white

∆ 20430.N Next

∆ 19430 grey

∆ 19430.B white

20432 grey

20432.B white

20432.N Next

19432 grey

19432.B white

16915 grey

Plana

16915.B white

∆ 14430 white

∆ 14430.SL Silver

14432 white

14432.SL Silver

Electronic temperature sensor 1 output

Wired temperature sensor, cable length 4 m 02965

Weather station, KNX standard, power supply 12-32 Vdc or 12-24 Vac 01546 ∆ Available until stocks last

WELL-CONTACT PLUS Selection guide Components for the automation Description

Code

Description

DIN rail appliances (60715 TH35)

Actuator for fluorescent lamps with 12 relay outputs 10 A 250 V~ 50/60 Hz for fluorescent lamps, KNX standard, occupies 12 modules size 17,5 mm

Input/output device 4 relay outputs NO 16 A 250 V~, 4 inputs for NO contacts, KNX standard, occupies 4 modules size 17,5 mm 01521

Actuator for 8 roller shutters 6 A 230 V~ 50/60 Hz relay outputs, KNX standard, occupies 8 modules size 17,5 mm

Code

01522

Actuator for two roll-up blinds with relay outputs 16 A 250 V~, KNX standard, occupies 4 modules size 17,5 mm 01525

01524

Dimmer 2 inputs for 01530, 2 relay outputs NO 16 A 250 V~, 2 outputs 1-10 V, KNX standard, occupies 4 modules size 17,5 mm

KNX DALI gateway 8-channel for 16 lamps per channel, occupies 4 modules size 17,5 mm 01544

KNX IP interface occupies 4 modules size 17,5 mm

01528

Interface with 4 programmable channels as inputs or outputs for LEDs, KNX standard 01515

01547

Dimmer 230 V~ 50/60 Hz for 2x300 W incandescent lamps, 2x300 VA ferromagnetic transformers, 2x300 VA electronic transformers, KNX standard, occupies 4 modules size 17,5 mm

Device with 4 programmable digital inputs for NO, NC contacts, 120-230 V~, KNX standard, occupies 2 modules size 17,5 mm 01510

01526

Actuator with 4 relay outputs NO 16 A 250 V~ KNX standard, occupies 4 modules size 17,5 mm 01523

System components Description

Code

Description

DIN rail appliances (60715 TH35)

Power supply unit with Bus output of 30 Vdc 320 mA, power supply 120-230 V~ 50/60 Hz, with decoupling coil, KNX standard, occupies 4 modules size 17,5 mm

Line coupler KNX standard, it occupies 2 modules size 17,5 mm 01500

Power supply unit with Bus auxiliary output of 30 Vdc 640 mA, auxiliary output 30 Vdc, power supply 85-265 V~ 50/60 Hz, with decoupling coil, KNX standard, occupies 4 modules size 17,5 mm

∆ 01504

B-type USB interface KNX standard, occupies 2 modules size 17,5 mm 01501.1

01540

Safety transformer 230 V~, 12-24 V~ (SELV) 24 VA, for continuous service, occupies 3 modules size 17,5 mm

Line coupler KNX standard, occupies 2 modules size 17,5 mm 01504.1

Code

16887

WELL-CONTACT PLUS Selection guide System components Code

Description

IR presence detector 360° motion range, for lightings depending on the brightness, 0-100 Lux adjustable brightness range, KNX standard, for ceiling installation

Code

Brightness sensor for dimmer 01528, for ceiling installation 01529

01530

WELL-CONTACT PLUS

Description

Cable 2x2x0.8 mm, free of LSZH halogens, KNX standard, green - 100 m

Adapter for IR presence detector for 01529 with brightness sensor, ceiling installation 01529.S

01890

Software and interface Description

WCS Gestionali

Code

WCS Office Client

01589 WCS Light

WCS Office WCS Gestionali WCS ClientWCS Office Client WCS Top

Well-contact Suite Software for managing and controlling devices in the Well-contact Plus system, complete with CD and hardware key

WCS Gestionali

WCS Office Client

01590 WCS Basic

WCS OfficeWCS Basic WCS Client 01591 01592 WCS Top WCS Client

WCS Office WCS Client WCS Top WCS WCSBasic Gestionali WCS Office Client

WCS Office WCS Gestionali WCS ClientWCS Office Client WCS Basic WCS Client 01594 WCS Top WCS Office01595 01593 WCS Management WCS Office Client WCS Office WCS Gestionali

WCS Office Client WCS Top

WCS Top

WCS Office WCS Basic

WCS Basic

WCS Client

WCS Top

WCS Basic

Hardware interface for programming By-me serial devices and configuring systems Well-contact Plus touch screens 01993

Software suite with EasyTool Professional LT, touch screen programming for the Well-contact Plus system complete with USB interface, EasyDraw and EasyCap software for designing and quoting electrical systems ∆ 01991

∆ Available until stocks last

WELL-CONTACT PLUS General characteristics Field of application The Well-contact Plus system, in the hotel and tertiary sector, enables making centralized management systems that allow integrating and supervising many functions and services efficiently guaranteeing simplicity of use by the personnel in charge. More and more often, in fact, hotels and more in general hospitality facilities require systems for optimized and effective management of their services that simplify daily operation and, as far as possible, reduce running costs, optimizing energy savings and guaranteeing a high level of comfort for their guests. The devices of the Well-contact Plus system, developed to KNX standard technology and aesthetically coordinated with the residential series of Eikon, Idea and Plana, offer technical solutions featuring outstanding efficiency, perfectly meeting all the most varied installation requirements and the constraints imposed by the different structures such as hotels, offices, shopping malls and the advanced tertiary sector in general.

Main characteristics Based entirely on KNX technology, each device is able to perform the required functions directly; each component has resident intelligence that allows direct dialogue with all the devices in the network. The KNX standard was developed to create decentralized systems where the interchange of signals and commands takes place exclusively at the operational device level: that is, each component is able to process data independently and transmit and/or detect signals directly on the system's Bus. In short, therefore, each structure and each application can assign the priorities that it deems necessary without having to accept “take it or leave it” solutions and in any case without jeopardizing the possibility of a future implementation to extend the system’s functions. Thanks to Well-contact Plus, each hospitality facility can select the most suitable solution, “customizing” it and ensuring the flexibility that only the common European protocol (KNX) can provide in terms of interoperability of devices and secure installation. The single devices such as the external transponder reader, the reader with a pocket and the thermostat, besides the typical functions of card recognition and electrical lock opening, service activation and temperature control respectively, have freely programmable inputs and outputs that make the system really flexible. These inputs/outputs can be used to control sockets (courtesy lights, etc.), room service calls, alarms (ceiling pull, etc.) and energy savings (turning off the heating/air-conditioning after detecting an open window, etc.).

The range of products is completed by a DIN rail input/output device able to manage 4 inputs and 4 outputs, all freely programmable, that can be associated with additional services such as, for example, controlled sockets, room indicators, alarms and scenarios that enable the various users depending on who enters the room (guest, service personnel, maintenance engineer, etc.); everything will obviously always be supervised by reception that, thanks to the Well-contact Suite software, entirely developed by Vimar, will have control over all the events linked to the guest’s “history” for the entire duration of her stay. The functions that each device must perform are programmed with the ETS software; in other words, a project is created in which each room is composed of a certain number of components, each of which is assigned operational parameters. It will therefore be possible to choose, for instance, whether a relay must work in one-position stable, two-position stable, N/C or N/O mode or the type of thermostat temperature control (proportional integral, ON/OFF, etc.) or set up an input to recognize signal fronts, cyclical repetitions, etc.. ETS also enables Well-contact Plus devices to interact with other KNX appliances not supplied by Vimar, not only to make the system suitable for the widest range of applications, but also to be able to supplement it with existing devices (renovations). The main competitive characteristics of the Well-contact Plus system can be summarized as follows: • no centralized intelligent room module is necessary; • all the functions and “intelligence” of the system are distributed over the various appliances; • the recess-mounting devices that must be installed in the room are equipped with free inputs and relay outputs that reduce the need for additional terminals; • the system is extremely flexible thanks to the modularity of the range and its potential for easy, low-cost expansion to meet future needs; • extremely simple, flexible system management software that also allows interfacing with the most widely used administrative software.

WELL-CONTACT PLUS General characteristics

For the purposes of the application functions, the most important information transmitted by each device is the following: • the recipient address field indicating the devices to receive the message; • the field containing the information related to the actual function that the device must perform; • the sender’s address indicating the device that has sent the message. Each device has a specific “physical” address that identifies it uniquely in the system and therefore there can be no identical physical addresses. As regards the recipient address, under normal operational conditions, this is always a group address; the group addresses make “logical wiring” among different components and it is therefore possible to establish functional correlations (even very complex ones) among the various devices. Modifying the group addresses with the special ETS configuration software changes the functions of the devices (for instance associations between inputs and outputs) without making any changes to the system wiring. The basic component of the system is the line segment; this is also the starting point for expanding the system up to the maximum possible configuration in terms of devices and shared functions. Each line segment can be composed of up to 64 devices (readers, thermostats, I/O devices, etc.) and needs one or two power supplies depending on the number of components. If two power supplies are used, they must be set apart at a distance of no less than 200 m. The maximum distance between a device and the power unit on the same line must not exceed 350 m. The maximum distance between two devices on the same line must not exceed 700 m.

Well-contact Plus system general diagram · up to 15 field coupler defining 15 fields. · max main line length: 1000 m

Bbc Field coupler (15 max)

LC Line coupler (15 max) 1

64 KNX devices (64 max)

15 64

4 64

4 4

1 LC 15

WELL-CONTACT PLUS

The Well-contact Plus system uses a twisted pair cable as the means of transmission; using the Bus line not only simplifies installation/maintenance, but also ensures a high level of immunity from interference. Information is exchanged between the devices in “telegrams” composed of a set of bits whose combinations encode the transmitted information.

2 1 LC 15 1 6L4C 15 L 1 C 15 4 4 2 64 3 3 4 1 LC 15 64 2 2 6 3 4 1 L4C 15 1 LC 4 2 4 6 3 4 1 L4C 15 3 2 64 3 2 64 4 1 6L4C 15 2 1 LC 3 64 3 212585 64 4 1 LC4 4 4 2 3 64 3128 ... 64 4 3 1 6L4C 4 LC 2 64 4 2 ... 64 2 L 3 L 1 LC 2 64 4 3 1 CC 4 1 LC4 3 212585 64 4 2 64 3 3 64 4 ... 3 1 LC4 24 3 1 6L4C 3 LC 128 64 4 2 2 3 L 2 6 4 C 4 64 4 3 1 4 3 1 LC 23 1 LC 1 3128 64 4 2 ... 1 6L4CL4C 2 212585 1 LC4 2 64 3 4 3 1 LC4 23 3 ... 128 64 4 2... 3 1 LC 2 LC 2 3 1 6L4CL4C 24 1 6L4C4 2 2 L 3 128 64 4 ... 3 C L 2 1 LC 0 64 4C 31 2 1 LC 1 3 212585 ... 3 1 6L4C4 2333 1 LC4 22 128 64 64L4C 2 ... L 3 1 LC 1 3 1 64C4 23 3 1 LC4 2 128 LC ... 64L4C L 2 3 1 C 21 64 4 2 Bbc ... 3 212585 1 LC 0 64LC 3 1 LC4 22 3 1 LC 21 64 4 2 ... L 1 LC 0 LC 3 1 C4 22 1 LC 2 64 4 1 1 LC 0 3 2 4 s 3 L Bbc 64 3 1 C 21 1 LC 0 te m 4 2 L sys Bbc 3 1 C 21 1 LC 0 er 4 oth 2 Bbc 3 o L · up T C 1 0 2 to Bbc wit 64 K 1 LC 0 . Bbc ds · m h add NX de iel itio ax vic 5f d B n e bc sam ista al li s th g1 m n n n i a Bbc 00 · m e line ce be e cou t ris fin ing ax de h: 10 tw : p to 2 t rs and dista 70 0 m een t lers 55 ple ng wo dev nce b ou ine le dev c ice e d el ice : 35 twee iel s in 0m np 5 f bon owe the o 1 ck r su p t ba · u max pply ·

Main line

System architecture

bo a ck

line

Up to three couplers can be connected to each line as repeaters, each one of which manages a segment of up to 64 devices with their power supplies for a maximum of 255 devices. The Bus line can be connected in different configurations (star, tree, etc.); the maximum length in any case must not exceed 1000 m. Lines can be connected together with the 01504 couplers; it is possible to connect up to 15 lines on a single backbone, which is itself simply a line formed by all the couplers and the devices. This new element is called a field or area; the system can handle up to a maximum of 15 fields and this represents the maximum expansion of the system.

Installation topologies of a line LINEAR POWER SUPPLY ALIMENTATORE

MIXED ALIMENTATORE POWER SUPPLY

STAR POWER SUPPLY ALIMENTATORE

WELL-CONTACT PLUS General characteristics Example of a hospitality facility: wiring diagram Room 11

FLOOR 1

KNX Bus

* 20453

02952 01504.1

01500 01820

230 V~

Contact window

* 20457

20840 + (2) 20841.0 + (2) 20841.2

21849

01522 M

Lamp 2 (230 V~)

SV Courtesy light (230 V~)

(230 V~) Electric lock

Bathroom ceiling pull-cord

Fridge-minibar Fan coil Door open indicator Room service call button 230 V~

L N

Lamp 1 (230 V~)

12-24 V~ 12-24 V~

Common areas

GROUND FLOOR

01530

KNX Bus

Reception room light

BALLAST

0-10 V

02952 01504.1

01501.1

V+

V-

* 20457

01526

01528

01820 SV 21848 + 20788

KNX Bus

V+

V-

Contact window

(230 V~)

Electric lock

Courtesy light (230 V~)

Conference room light

12-24 V~ 12-24 V~

L1 N L2 L3

Reception

230 V~

* IMPORTANT: The transponder readers and the

vertical pocket ones should be powered separately from all other loads (electric locks, lamps, contactors, etc.) using a transformer dedicated to them art. 16887 whose outputs should be used solely for these two devices.

01500

01540

230 V~

Notes In the diagram only some of the inputs and outputs equipping the devices are used. To avoid electrical interference in the power supply circuit caused by the electric locks, it is advisable to power them with a dedicated transformer.

WELL-CONTACT PLUS General characteristics Characteristics Number of Bus devices for each single line segment

max 64 (with power supply 640 mA)

Number of lines

max 16 per field (total 241 lines)

Number of fields

max 15

Maximum distance between two devices

700 m

Minimum working voltage

21 Vdc

Number of power supplies for line segments

max 2

Max current per line

640 mA

Minimum distance between the two power supplies

200 m

Topology

Permitted connections

linear, tree, star and mixed

Transmission

Transmission technology

decentralized, by event, serial, symmetrical

Transmission speed

9600 baud

Bus cable section

2 x 2 x 0.8 mm2

Max length per line

1000 m

Bus devices

Power supply

Cable

Example of system composition When creating an installation with the Well-contact Plus system the following components are used: • Power supplies • Line coupler • Transponder card reader • Transponder card reader with pocket • Thermostat • 4,3” colour touch screen • 3-module monochrome touch screen • Control with 4 independent push buttons • Transponder card reader/programmer • Input/output device • USB interface

Preparing the system It is important, in the phase of preparing the system, to have a clear idea of which functions and applications are to be created and obviously this will depend on the type and complexity of the property where the installation is to be made. The system is composed of a range of 8 types of devices; it will be in the configuration phase with ETS where you assign the “task” that each of these devices must perform, which will be the input/ output associations and the services to control. IMPORTANT: The transponder readers and the vertical pocket ones should be powered separately from all other loads (electric locks, lamps, contactors, etc.) using a transformer dedicated to them art. 16887 whose outputs should be used solely for these two devices. As regards the actual preparation of the system and therefore laying out the cables and positioning the devices, it will be enough to take into account the characteristics given in the above table, observing the following precautions: • add up the power inputs of the single devices (that must be no more than 64 for each line segment) so as to determine the number of power supplies to install; if the current draw of the devices in a line is greater than the current delivered by the power supply (for instance 320 mA) it is necessary to connect an additional power supply or use a power supply able to deliver a greater current (for instance 640 mA); • the transponder readers and the ones with a pocket are

WELL-CONTACT PLUS

Well-contact Plus system

equipped with an additional supplementary power supply with respect to the connection on the KNX Bus 12-24 V. • evaluate accurately, according to the size of the property, whether a line can be considered as a floor or whether a line can cover a number of floors or, vice versa, whether the property is so large that covering a floor requires a number of lines (therefore, at the design stage, take account of the characteristics of a line in terms of number of devices and distances); • the number of lines forming the system will determine the number of couplers that must be installed (the lines are connected together by line couplers that allow communication between devices belonging to different lines); • at the design stage, always try and bring each type of system into line with the diagram in the figure on page 15; this is to determine the correct position of the various devices within the system. The installation examples give the layouts illustrating part of a typical hotel system; all the devices given in the examples are summarised in the general structure of the Well-contact Plus system (see the above table). The ground floor is composed of: reception, dining hall, administrative office, conference hall, technical room and store, while on the other floors there are the guest rooms. In each room on the first floor, the following items are installed: • an external transponder reader to access the room and display the messages via the 4 front LEDs; • a reader with a pocket to activate the associated loads (services); • a thermostat to control the temperature set-point; • a control with four independent push buttons for “do not disturb”, “room service call” and “lights control” functions; In the suites, in place of the control with four independent push buttons, two 3-module touch screens are installed to govern lights, climate and any scenarios. The transponder readers are additionally used to distinguish between accesses to the offices and to the other places (store, technical room, etc.) located on the ground floor; this highlights how the Well-contact Plus system can easily be used in both hotels and the tertiary sector.

WELL-CONTACT PLUS General characteristics ETS Software For the design, configuration of the various appliances and the commissioning of the system, installers have the ETS software (Engineering Tools Software), marketed by KNX Association. Using a PC and the ETS software, you address the different devices operating in the system and establish the related functional correlations (or group addresses). Establishing the functional correlations means using software to define how each device must intervene following the events occurring in the system, for instance which lamp or group of loads must switch on when a card is inserted in the reader with a pocket or a particular switch is pressed. The operating mode of KNX appliances is also determined by the application program selected from among the available ones for that device and by the appropriate configuration of the related operating parameters. The application programs of Vimar KNX devices are freely available on the company’s website www.vimar.com. The addresses and operating parameters are transferred to the various devices by connecting the PC to the KNX Bus via the KNX USB interface 01540. The ETS software utilizes simple graphical user interfaces that facilitate device configuration also in relation to the building’s layout.

Configuration phases 1. Definition of physical addresses, functional correlations and operational parameters for the various system devices.

2. Transfer of addresses and parameters to the appliances.

+ ETS ETS + Software applications software applicativi

Transponder reader Lettore a transponder

USB interface Interfaccia USB 01540

20457 16927 14457

i - BUS KNX 230 V ~ Thermostat Termostato 02952 16921

Input/output device Dispositivo di ingresso/uscita 01522

3. At the end of the operations the PC can be removed, to be, if necessary, reconnected only for functions of diagnostics, changes to the parameters, addresses and functional or expansional correlations of the system.

To purchase the ETS software, obtain a free “demo” version or receive more technical and commercial information we suggest you contact the KNX Association.

Supervision and control at a higher level As already mentioned the KNX distributed intelligence systems also enable supervision and control at a higher level (centralized). Use of PCs and special software enables centralizing the system’s functions, but in no way does it jeopardize their operation if the PC is switched off or malfunctions.

Group addresses

Building topology

ETS software window

Note. In a Well-contact Suite system, when using the ETS project, there must be no groups with the same name: for example it will be necessary to distinguish between “power room 101” and “power room 102.” ETS project creation respecting this clause will enable the Well-contact Suite software to distinguish

Buildings

automatically between the group addresses it must display and the ones it must mask for each room, considerably facilitating the task of room creation with Wellcontact Suite.

Well-contact Suite Software

Solutions for the Tertiary Sector

Well-contact Suite (WCS) is a family of software products (WCS Light, WCS Basic, WCS Top, WCS Client, WCS Office, WCS Client Office and WCS Management) that enables managing/ supervising the entire system with operations of check-in, room status, events memory, alarm control, temperature control, guest file, etc. The following chart gives the functions of the Suite.

The versatility of these components and the Vimar WCS Office and WCS Office Client software enables flexible management of tertiary sector applications and particularly productions within the framework of office buildings; similar in use, the requirements in office buildings/blocks adhere perfectly to the functions performed by the Vimar components with the KNX standard. Thanks to the peculiarities of the KNX standard it is possible to expand the system at any time with devices already present on the market able to satisfy even the most sophisticated and specific applications, such as for instance controlling the opening of a passage, complete management of lights and temperature, programmable also by floor, side of exposure or single office. The system applications can therefore be the most varied; from access diversification to customizing each single office with the generation of cards that also allows access to common rooms such as, for instance, general entrances, canteens/ restaurants, reserved lounges, conference rooms, etc., all using the transponder reader. With the aid of the pocket reader it will then also be possible, in all those rooms not normally controlled by time programs or motion detectors, to manage the lighting or temperature (energy savings).

Controllable functions Card identification Guest Room Check-in\Check-out Management of Services and Privileges (creation of cards with services enabling) Access log and display Stopping access to single rooms Room booking Displaying room reserved, booked, occupied, identification of guest in room Displaying length of stay, day of departure Checking PW of personnel with hourly and area limitation Diversification of users (guests, service personnel, etc.) Displaying different types of alarms and changing the warning status Protection with unique Hardware Key for guest Searching and exporting entry report

Depending on the functions to be implemented, therefore, the most appropriate choices can be made to optimize the costs that the client will have to sustain.

The topic of lighting in offices is by now the subject of specific design studies; switching on lamps not only with a manual control but also with programs linked to time or to the side of exposure to sunlight enables significant energy savings; with the input/output devices it is possible, for instance, to connect light sensors capable of detecting the degree of brightness and switch lights on and off in a differentiated manner according to the set threshold value. With these same devices it is also possible to transmit status or alarm signals from auxiliary contacts or remote sensors that can be displayed both on the readers and on the monitoring PC (if applicable). Lastly, as regards temperature control, in modern office buildings the possibility of switching on the heating or air-conditioning in a differentiated manner has become an increasingly requested comfort requirement especially for the savings provided in terms of energy optimization; all of this can be performed by suitably programming the thermostats of the Well-contact Plus system.

Room supervision screen

Customer card screen

Checking and managing transit through common areas Advanced search functions (by text categories) Displaying service requests Managing the records of the hotel’s staff and guests Guest book with any saved parameters Supervision (temperatures, I/O, alarms, security, lights) Guest management with Client-Server Logic on local area network or remotely via web Levels of protection (password) for differentiated access Seven levels of access “privileges” to be associated with the software users Possibility of managing scenarios and commands of virtual devices

WELL-CONTACT PLUS

WELL-CONTACT PLUS General characteristics

WELL-CONTACT PLUS Supervision 10" IP Multimedia video touch screen

21553.1 - Connections RJ45 socket

Audio signal terminals

Power: 12 V Power: 230 V

217,5

The multimedia video touch screen is a Due Fili Plus indoor video door entry unit that integrates with all the other devices in the video door entry system (entrance panels, call buttons, 290 power supplies, etc.) and allows you to manage video door entry functions such as viewing and voice communication with the caller, electric lock opening, switching on stair lighting and other auxiliary functions, intercom calls, baby watching, managing analogue cameras connected to the IP or Elvox Due Fili Plus system, ringtone customization, missed call management and the video door entry phone answering service. Besides the function of a video door entry unit, if the system includes the web server (01545), the device enables monitoring and controlling all the devices in the Well-contact Plus system. In addition, if the network to which it is connected is enabled for web browsing, the device also features some pre-installed applications that allow you to take advantage of services such as weather forecasts, news, RSS feed reader, and a web radio controller. Other off-line applications are instead always active, providing additional functionality (video and photo viewing, MP3 player, calendar with reminders, graphic, text or audible notes).

Video door entry terminals

Technical specifications

Configuration

• 10” horizontal touch screen • SDHC port for saving voicemail and multimedia files • Reset button • Installation, with mounting frame provided, on 8-module flush mounting box V71318. Important: The flush mounting box must always be installed in a vertical position

If you are using the device as a video door entry unit, configuration is done directly on the screen using the wizard with a simple graphical interface. Whereas, if you want to configure the device as a Well-contact Plus system supervisor combined with the web server KNX 01545, you need to use the ETS software and set the corresponding communication objects. After connecting the multimedia video touch screen to the web server via the Ethernet port, you can supervise the entire home automation system by accessing the database on the web server.

Video door entry function • View call from external station; • Communication with external station or call button; • Open electrical lock; • Switch on stair lights or other auxiliary function; • Make or receive intercom calls with other video touch screens, video door entry systems and hands-free entry phones; • Audio monitoring; • View images received from multiple video cameras for room monitoring, baby watching, etc.; • web server answering service for remote access Automation functions • automation functions (automation functions require the web server KNX 01545 to be installed) • ON/OFF command and light dimming • Roller shutter and blind control • HVAC control • Scenario activation • Analogue camera viewing over Due Fili Plus Bus • IP camera viewing via LAN connection • viewing cameras connected to DVR and controlling them via APP

Conformity to Standards LV Directive, EMC Directive Standards EN 60950-1, EN 61000-6-1, EN 61000-6-3

Technical data power supply current draw at 12 Vdc current draw at 230 Vac audio/video module current draw operating temperature Inputs power supply 12 Vdc Power: 230 V connection with web server 01945 Bus digital line (Due Fili Plus) supplementary power supply (+28 Vdc, 24 Vac) supplementary power supply (GND, 24 Vac) N/O landing push button (bell function) ground reference for N/O landing push button Outputs to distribute an audio signal separately from the main one power supply for supplementary relay/ringtone control for supplementary relay/ringtone

12 Vdc, 230 Vac 600 mA 150 mA 120 mA from - 5 °C to + 40 °C (indoor use) +NL RJ45 1, 2 (input/output) E+ EFP M LINE OUT (Left and Right) +12 CH

WELL-CONTACT PLUS Supervision 10" IP Multimedia video touch screen 10” multimedia IP video touch screen, Due Fili Plus video door entry indoor station and web-server based home automation system supervisor, complete with mounting frame for installation on box V71318. Cover plate not supplied.

217,5

21553.1

Cover plates for 10” multimedia video touch screen

21665.11

21665.70

aluminium

diamond white

21665.76

diamond black

Examples of multimedia video touch screenshots

Menu selection

Incoming video call:

Video entry phone settings

Viewing rooms with cameras

Browsing the web page for the weather forecast

Web “News” page

The drawings of the side views give the overall dimensions and the flush depth in mm

WELL-CONTACT PLUS

60,5

EIKON

WELL-CONTACT PLUS Supervision 4.3” full flat colour touch screen

Configuration

The device is used in the Well-contact Plus automation system to command lights, roller shutters, HVAC and scenarios. An external temperature sensor (20432, 19432, 14432) can be connected to the touch screen in order to monitor climate in the area in which the sensor is installed (maximum length of cable connecting sensor to devices: 60 m). The touch screen is configured via the KNX Touch Screen Configurer software (contained in art. 01991) connecting the USB interface to the special connector on the front of the device. The touch screen allows the supervision and control of all the devices in the automation system that have been configured.

The touch screen is configured using the KNX Touch Screen Configurer and the programming interface 01991; the functions (groups, scenarios, etc.) to be commanded via the touch screen are selected from the database of the ETS project with which the system was configured. The KNX Touch Screen Configurer software can be downloaded free of charge from the “Software di prodotto” (Product Software) section of the website www.vimar.com. All the updated ETS databases can be downloaded from the “Software di prodotto” (Product Software) section of the website www.vimar.com. Moreover, when configuring with EasyTool Pro LT, you can custom configure the colour aspect of the 4.3" touch screen by choosing between “black skin” and “white skin”, for a perfect total look of the entire system.

Technical specifications • display: 4.3” TFT • connect to the auxiliary output of the power supply 01501.1 • external temperature sensor (20432, 19432, 14432): maximum length of the cable connecting the sensor to the devices: 60 m. Use a twisted cable with a minimum cross-section of 0.5 mm2 (01840) • possible functions: - ON/OFF switch (lights on/off) - roller shutters control - dimmer control (light dimming) - scenario activation - HVAC control. • number of pages: up to 60 pages with 8 icons each (a dimmer / roller shutter and the HVAC occupy 2 icons)

21848 - Front view and connections

Technical data power supply current draw at 12 Vdc current draw at 29 Vdc current draw from the Bus

12-29 Vdc 120 mA 60 mA 10 mA from - 5 °C to + 40 °C (indoor use)

operating temperature Inputs power supply 12-29 Vdc KNX TP Bus

V+ VBus + -

external temperature sensor (20432, 19432, 14432) connection with interface 01991

temperature sensor terminals

PIN-STRIP connector

TP Busbar terminals

display

PIN-STRIP connector for connecting to interface 01991

Operation Touching the icons on the main screen for the four main menus opens the subsequent screens that enable you to control and command the Well-contact Plus system using the icons displayed each time.

Conformity to Standards EMC directive Standard EN 50428, EN 50090-2-2

“Black and white skin” screenshots

power supply terminals 12 - 29Vdc

WELL-CONTACT PLUS Supervision 4,3” Full Flat colour touch screen 4,3” Full Flat colour touch screen for control, Well-contact Plus, 1 input for temperature sensor, complete with mounting frame for installation in 8-module box. To be completed with Eikon, Arké or Plana 8-module cover plates

119,6

39,9

21848

21848.B

grey

21848.BN*

white

neutral

*Ideal for matching with the Next version of other devices.

50,4

Accessories for 4.3” colour touch screen V71318 V71718 V71328 V71631 20788

8-module flush mounting box (GW 650°C), for masonry walls, blue 8-module flush mounting box (GW 850°C), for light walls, blue Anti-mortar protective cover for V71318 and V71718 boxes, yellow Cover for flush mounting boxes V71318 and V71718, to be fixed to the anti-mortar cover V71328 included, white mounting box 8 modules (4+4). Equipped with frame for Eikon Classic or Round 8-module cover plate. To be completed with Eikon .B .N Table Classic or Round cover plate

19788 .B 14788 .SL 21668...

As above, for Arké As above, for Plana Eikon Evo: 8-module cover plate (4+4): Premium (anodized aluminium), Exclusive (faced aluminium), Sculpted (carved stone), Natural (solid wood), Luminous (crystal), Refined (natural leather), Special (Corian®) and Essential (total aluminium and glass)

20668...

Eikon: Classic 8-module cover plate (4+4): Bright (painted metal), Galvanic (galvanic metal), Stainless steel, Stone, Wood (solid wood), Glass (crystal) and Reflex (technopolymer)

20698...

Eikon: Round 8-module cover plate (4+4): Bright (painted metal), Galvanic (galvanic metal), Stainless steel, Wood (solid wood) and Glass (crystal)

19668...

Arké: Classic 8-module cover plate (4+4): Metal-Color (painted metal) Metal-Elite (faced metal), Alu-Tech (aluminium), Wood (solid

19698...

Arké: Round 8-module cover plate (4+4): Metal-Color (painted metal) Metal-Elite (faced metal), Wood (solid wood), Reflex Plus

14668...

wood), Color-Tech (painted technopolymer) and Tecno-Basic (technopolymer)

(reflex), Color-Tech (painted technopolymer) and Tecno-Basic (technopolymer) Plana: 8-module cover plate (4+4), available in these finishes and colours: technopolymer and Reflex

19788

19788.B

14788

14788.SL

grey

white

21668...

V71328

white

20788

Silver

20668...

V71631

grey

20698...

The drawings of the side views give the overall dimensions and the flush depth in mm

19668...

V71718

V71318

20788.B

20788.N

19698...

14668...

white

WELL-CONTACT PLUS

10,5

EIKON ARKÉ and PLANA

WELL-CONTACT PLUS Supervision 4.3” colour touch screen for monitoring and control

Configuration

Touch screen device to be used in the automation system for controlling lights, roller shutters, air-conditioning and scenarios. An external temperature sensor (20432, 19432, 14432) can be connected to the touch screen in order to monitor climate in the area in which the sensor is installed (maximum length of cable connecting sensor to devices: 60 m). The device is configured with the KNX Touch Screen Configurer software connecting the interface 01991 to the special connector on the front of the device. The touch screen allows the supervision and control of all the devices in the automation system that have been configured.

Technical specifications • TFT 4.3” display • possible functions: - ON/OFF switch (lights on/off) - roller shutter and blinds control - dimmer control (light dimming) - scenario activation - HVAC control - display of the main physical data (m/s, m/s2 A, V, °C, °F, °K, Lux, etc.) • number of pages: up to 60 with 8 icons each (one dimmer/ roller shutters occupies 2 icons)

power supply current draw at 12 Vdc current draw at 29 Vdc current draw from the Bus

12-29 Vdc 120 mA 60 mA 10 mA from - 5 °C to + 45 °C (indoor use)

operating temperature Inputs power supply 12-29 Vdc KNX TP Bus

V+ VBus + -

external temperature sensor (20432, 19432, 14432) connection with interface 01991

PIN-STRIP connector

Conformity to Standards EMC directive, Standard EN 50428, EN 50090-2-2

20848.1 - Front view and connections

power supply terminals 12 - 29 Vdc

terminals KNX TP Bus

display

PIN-STRIP connector for connecting to interface 01991

Operation Touch the icons on the main screen for room control and the touch screen settings to access the following screens that

enable checking and controlling the system with the icons displayed.

Example of “white skin” configuration of the touch screen

Main menu

Room Selection

Settings

Room control

Local temperature

WELL-CONTACT PLUS Supervision Colour touch screen 4,3” 4,3” colour touch screen for control, Well-contact Plus, 1 input for temperature sensor, complete with mounting frame for installation in 8-module boxes

39,9

119,6

∆ 20848.1 grey

∆ 20848.1.B white

∆ 20848.1.N Next

ARKÉ 50,9

∆ 19848.1 grey

∆ 19848.1.B white

∆ 14848.1 white

∆ 14848.1.SL Silver

PLANA

The drawings of the side views give the overall dimensions and the flush depth in mm

∆ Available until stocks last

WELL-CONTACT PLUS

EIKON

WELL-CONTACT PLUS Supervision 3-module Full Flat colour touch screen for room control Touch screen device with colour display to be used in the Well-contact Plus automation system to control lights, roller shutters, HVAC and scenarios. The device allows you to connect an external temperature sensor (20432, 19432, 14432) to view climate in the area in which the sensor is installed (maximum length of cable connecting sensor to devices: 60 m). The device is configured with the KNX Touch Screen Configurer software connecting the interface 01998 to the special connector on the front of the device. The touch screen can be installed either horizontally or vertically. It is recommended to install the touch screen at a height of 150 cm from the floor level.

Technical specifications • possible functions: - ON/OFF control (lights on/off); - roller shutters control; - dimmer control (light dimming); - scenario activation; - HVAC control; - 5 pages (screens) that can be configured to control a room.

21849.1 - Front view and connections display

PIN-STRIP connector for connecting to interface 01991

external temperature sensor terminals

TP Busbar terminals

Configuration The Full Flat touch screen is configured using the KNX Touch Screen Configurer and the programming interface 01998; the functions (groups, scenarios, etc.) to be commanded via the touch screen are selected from the database of the ETS project with which the system was configured. The KNX Touch Screen Configurer software and the updated ETS databases can be downloaded free of charge from the “Software di prodotto” (Product Software) section of the website www.vimar.com. Moreover, when configuring, you can custom configure the colour aspect of the 3-module colour Full Flat touch screen by choosing between “black skin” and “white skin”, for a perfect total look of the entire system.

Technical data power supply via Bus current draw from Bus operating temperature Inputs KNX TP Bus

30 Vdc SELV 42 mA from - 5 °C to + 40 °C (indoor use) Bus + -

external temperature sensor (20432, 19432, 14432) connection with interface 01991

PIN-STRIP connector

Examples of screens

Operation Touch the icons on the main screen of the colour display to access other icons that enable controlling the associated Wellcontact Plus devices and make the settings (date, time, etc.).

Conformity to Standards EMC Directive, EN 50428 standard

HVAC control

Room Management

WELL-CONTACT PLUS Supervision 3-module Full Flat colour touch screen for room control Full Flat colour touch screen for room control, Well-contact Plus, 1 input for temperature sensor - 3 modules

EIKON ARKÉ and PLANA

45,3 37

grey

21849.1.B

white

21849.1.BN*

WELL-CONTACT PLUS

21849.1

neutral

EIKON

45,3 37

∆ 21849 grey

∆ 21849.BN* neutral

*Suitable for matching with white and Next versions of other devices. The drawings of the side views give the overall dimensions and the flush depth in mm

∆ Available until stocks last

WELL-CONTACT PLUS Supervision 3-module monochrome touch screen for room control

20849, 16849 and 14849 - Front view and connections of touch screen

Device with a touch screen to be used in the automation system for controlling lights, roller shutters, air-conditioning and scenarios. The device is configured with the KNX Touch Screen Configurer software connecting the interface 01998 to the special connector on the back of the device. The touch screen can be installed either horizontally or vertically.

display

Technical specifications • possible functions: - ON/OFF control (lights on/off) - roller shutters control - dimmer control (light dimming) - scenario activation - HVAC control - display of the main physical data (m/s, m/s2 A, V, °C, °F, °K, Lux, etc.) - up to 3 screens that can be configured for controlling a room • number of pages: 3 with up to 8 icons each (one dimmer/ roller shutters occupies 2 icons)

Configuration Using the ETS project database with which the system was configured, select the functions (groups, scenarios, etc.) that you want to control via the touch screen The KNX Touch Screen Configurer software and the updated ETS databases can be downloaded free of charge from the “Software di prodotto” (Product Software) section of the website www.vimar.com.

Operation Touch the icons on the main screen to access other icons that enable controlling the associated devices and make the settings (date, time, etc.) on the touch screen.

PIN-STRIP connector for connecting to interface 01991

Drag vert

KNX TP Bus terminals

Drag vert

Technical data power supply via Bus current draw from Bus

Conformity to Standards EMC directive Standard EN 50428, EN 50090-2-2

Dragoperating oriz temperature

30 Vdc 10 mA from - 5 °C to + 45 °C (indoor

Drag oriz use)

Inputs KNX TP Bus connection with interface 01991

Drag oriz

Bus + PIN-STRIP connector

Flick

Press

Tap

Main menu

Display Setting menu

Drag vert

Room Control menu

Information menu

WELL-CONTACT PLUS Supervision 3-module monochrome touch screen Monochrome touch screen for room control, Well-contact Plus - 3 modules

EIKON

46,5 37

∆ 20849.B white

∆ 20849.N Next

ARKÉ

WELL-CONTACT PLUS

∆ 20849 grey

46,2 36,5

∆ 19849 grey

∆ 19849.B white

IDEA

47 36,8

16849.B

16849

white

grey

PLANA

46,5 36

∆ 14849 white

The drawings of the side views give the overall dimensions and the flush depth in mm

∆ 14849.SL Silver

∆ Available until stocks last

WELL-CONTACT PLUS Supervision 01545 - Web server for DIN rail (60715 TH35) Web server 01545 lets you manage the home & building automation system based on the KNX standard via a PC, notebook, tablet or touch screen, or even on a mobile device provided it has a browser able to view web pages. The Vimar By-web application can also be downloaded free from iTunes for iPhone and iPod touch mobile devices, allowing even faster access to system functions. The web server lets you manage either locally or from remote, all functions associated with the control of lights and roller shutters, HVAC, scenarios, "event" programmes and video surveillance with IP cameras. The access history screen (date and time, user, IP address of the user and type of event, login, logout, etc.) can be viewed at any time. The web server allows you to browse the functions of your home automation system in two ways: • browse by “rooms”: to physically manage functions by their location in the building; • browse by "functions": gives direct access to all functions of the same type, regardless of where they are located in the building; The list of "areas" can be customized by the installer to reflect the structure of the building and home automation system; it can also contain pages consisting of groups of functions not necessarily linked to an area in the building, such as a page of "favourites" for example. Vice versa, the list of "functions" cannot be modified.

01545 - Connections

Access only in case of special operations

CARD SD

01545 WEB SERVER FUNCTION

POWER

12V-30V= BUS RESET

LAN network jack 12-30 Vdc

KNX Bus

Supply voltage on

Note. The web server is compatible with the following browsers: Microsoft Internet Explorer (ver. 9 or later), Firefox (ver. 6 or later), Safari (ver. 5.1 or superior) and Google Chrome (ver. 14 or later).

Technical specifications • connect, with the appropriate clamp supplied, to the power supply 01830 • installation on DIN rail (60715 TH35): 8 modules of 17.5 mm

Configuration After configuring the Well-contact Plus devices via the ETS software (version 3 or 4) you need to import the project file into the Web Sever. During import, the Web Server will automatically assign the correct data coding and the look and feel to the objects created starting with the group addresses in the project and their types and descriptions.

Conformity to Standards LV Directive, EMC Directive Standards EN 60950-1, EN 50491

Configuration of the web server by setting via ETS

Technical data power supply current draw at 12 Vdc current draw at 30 Vdc dissipated power operating temperature Inputs power supply 12-30 Vdc KNX TP Bus LAN network jack

12 - 30 Vdc 210 mA 85 mA 4W from - 5 °C to + 45 °C (indoor use) 12 V - 30 V Bus + -

WELL-CONTACT PLUS Supervision Web server for DIN rail (60715 TH35) Web server for local and remote supervision of the KNX system, installation on DIN rails (60715 TH35), occupies 8 modules size 17.5 mm

WELL-CONTACT PLUS

01545

01945

Examples of management from web server browser

Rooms page

Lighting page

Loads page

Consumption page

WELL-CONTACT PLUS Control and supervision Control with 4 programmable buttons Home automation control device, 4 independently programmable buttons for managing single loads or scenarios, to be completed with a label and Eikon Tactil cover plate. The device consists of 4 independent touch buttons that, via the KNX Bus, enable controlling relay actuators, dimmer actuators and roller shutter actuators; they can also be used for calling up scenarios. The device is to be completed with the glass cover plate; the buttons however react to mechanical pressure even without fitting the cover plate so the configuration and the first operating test can be performed in this condition. You can define the colour of each icon with respect to the RGB range. Once set via ETS, the colour will remain associated with that icon regardless of the type or state of the load it controls. Via ETS it is possible to choose whether, when at rest, the device will remain with the button icons totally off, or all backlit at 30% brightness.

Conformity to Standards

21840 - Front view and connections LED for icons

Configuration button

Configuration LED

LED for icons

KNX TP Bus terminals

Technical data power supply via Bus current draw from Bus

30 Vdc SELV 35 mA from - 5 °C to + 45 °C (indoor use)

operating temperature Inputs KNX TP Bus

Bus +, -

EMC directive Standards EN 50428, EN 50491

Control with 6 programmable buttons Glass touch control device, 6 independently programmable buttons for managing single loads or scenarios, KNX standard, to be completed with a label and Eikon Tactil cover plate.

21860 - Front view and connections LED for icons

The device consists of 6 independent touch buttons that, via the KNX bus, enable controlling relay actuators, dimmer actuators and roller shutter actuators; they can also be used for calling up scenarios. The device is to be completed with the glass cover plate; the buttons however react to mechanical pressure even without fitting the cover plate so the configuration and the first operating test can be performed in this condition.

LED for icons

B KNX TP Bus terminals

You can define the colour of each icon with respect to the RGB range. Once set via ETS, the colour will remain associated with that icon regardless of the type or state of the load it controls. Via ETS it is possible to choose whether, when at rest, the device will remain with the button icons totally off, or all backlit at 30% brightness.

A: Configuration button B: Configuration LED

Technical data power supply via Bus current draw from Bus

Conformity to Standards

operating temperature

EMC directive Standards EN 50428, EN 50491

Inputs KNX TP Bus

NOTE: On controls 21840 and 21860 you can affix the labels (21847) to determine the symbol that will be displayed by the client for that button.

30 Vdc SELV 35 mA from - 5 °C to + 45 °C (indoor use) Bus +, -

WELL-CONTACT PLUS Control and supervision Control with 4 programmable buttons Automation control device, 4 independently programmable buttons for managing single loads or scenarios, KNX standard, to be completed with a label and Eikon Tactil cover plate - 2 modules

EIKON TACTIL

44,3 38

WELL-CONTACT PLUS

44,9

21840

Control with 6 programmable buttons Automation control device, 6 independently programmable buttons for managing single loads or scenarios, KNX standard, to be completed with a label and Eikon Tactil cover plate - 3 modules

EIKON TACTIL

44,3 38

21860

Adhesive labels for customizing Eikon Tactil 8 sheets of stickers with lightable symbols and lettering for standard functions for customizing Eikon Tactil controls

EIKON TACTIL

Label

Instructions for customisation • The controls must be customized by affixing an adhesive label (21847) in the designated areas of the device (top and bottom); • The symbol is backlit with RGB colours to be set during system programming.

21847 Control customized by fixing labels

The drawings of the side views give the overall dimensions and the flush depth in mm

WELL-CONTACT PLUS Control and supervision Control with 4 independent push buttons The device is equipped with four independent buttons that can be used for switching ON/OFF, controlling roller shutters and adjusting lights, to be completed with buttons. The device must be completed with simple or fixed 1 and/or 2 module buttons. The simple buttons enable identifying the programmed push button, while the fixed buttons are used to exclude buttons not yet configured. Important: Bear in mind that the 1 and/or 2 module buttons must be fitted on the control keeping the backlighting window facing the centre of the control. When ordering custom designed buttons, besides selecting the pictogram, you must also state whether it is the top or bottom button to be customized (see diagram on page 27). The configuration of the device, physical address and parameters takes place through the ETS software. If the input/ output device is loaded with an incorrect ETS application, the red LED will flash (“device type” error). To restore the desired configuration, load the device with the correct ETS application. If you set the device with "independent buttons", each of the 4 buttons can control a function entirely (for example with art. 20840 you can control 4 independent lights) and you will use the set of 1-module interchangeable buttons (for example art. 20841 containing 4 buttons). If you set the device with "2 associated channels", both buttons on the top (left and right) will do the same function, as the 2 buttons on the bottom (left and right), and you will use the 1-module covers (art. 20841) or the 2- module ones (art. 20842) depending on whether you wish to control one or two functions with the device. Technical data power supply via Bus current draw from Bus

30 Vdc SELV 10 mA from - 5 °C to + 45 °C (indoor use)

operating temperature Inputs KNX TP Bus

Front view and connections configuration button

LED

KNX Bus terminal

Operation The device can be used in two different modes: • functions with independent push buttons: - send ON, send OFF, timed ON - ON and OFF switch on the up and down side - call up scenario, save scenario - send value - dimmer control - toggle • functions with 2 associated channels: - ON/OFF switch - dimmer control - roller shutter control

Conformity to Standards EMC directive Standards EN 50090-2-2, EN 50428

Bus +, -

Control with four independent push buttons: Bus cable connection

Insulating sheath providing electrical insulation from the mains cables at 230 V~

Removable Bus connection terminal

LED

WELL-CONTACT PLUS Control and supervision Control with 4 independent push buttons Control with 4 independent push buttons, KNX standard, visible in darkness, to be completed with button - 2 modules

EIKON

27,5 44,8

20840

grey

ARKÉ

27,2 19

WELL-CONTACT PLUS

44,7

19840

grey

IDEA

16840

grey

16840.B

white

PLANA

27,2 19,5

14840

white

The drawings of the side views give the overall dimensions and the flush depth in mm

WELL-CONTACT PLUS Interchangeable buttons for control device Example Eikon Tactil control installation

Home automation control with 6 buttons 3-module mounting frame

The controls are customizable by fixing adhesive labels (art. 21847)

Eikon Tactil glass cover plate

Notes The controls must be customized by fixing an adhesive label (21847) in the designated areas of the device (top and bottom); the symbol is backlit with RGB colours to be set during system programming. The cover plate must be attached so that the central contacts perfectly match those of the control device 21840 or 21860.

Example of 1- and 2-module buttons installation

Control with 4 independent push buttons Simple button 1 neutral module and with arrows

2-central-module mounting frame for flush mounting

Customized 2-module simple button

1-module fixed button

2-module fixed button

2-central-module cover plate

Note. The simple buttons enable identifying the programmed push button, while the fixed buttons are used to exclude buttons not yet configured.

WELL-CONTACT PLUS Interchangeable buttons for control device EIKON

For articles in the white version: add .B to the code of the article in the grey version. For articles in the Next version: add .N to the code of the article in the grey version.

2-module control device

1-module interchangeable button

2-module interchangeable button

Simple 20840

Blank 20841

“O” symbol 20841.0

“I” symbol 20841.1

Blank 20842

“O” symbol 20842.0

“I” symbol 20842.1

“I/O” symbol 20841.2

With directional arrows 20841.3

With regulation symbol 20841.4

“I/O” symbol 20842.2

With directional arrows 20842.3

With regulation symbol 20842.4

Fixed button Blank 20843

Blank 20844 For articles in the white version: add .B to the code of the article in the grey version.

ARKÉ 2-module control device

1-module interchangeable button

2-module interchangeable button Simple button

Simple 19840

Blank 19841

“O” symbol 19841.0

“I” symbol 19841.1

Blank 19842

“O” symbol 19842.0

“I” symbol 19842.1

“I/O” symbol 19841.2

With directional arrows 19841.3

With regulation symbol 19841.4

“I/O” symbol 19842.2

With directional arrows 19842.3

With regulation symbol 19842.4

Fixed button Blank button 19843

Blank button 19844 For articles in the white version: add .B to the code of the article in the grey version.

IDEA 2-module control device

1-module interchangeable button

2-module interchangeable button Simple button

Simple 16840

Blank 16841

“O” symbol 16841.0

“I” symbol 16841.1

Blank 16842

“O” symbol 16842.0

“I” symbol 16842.1

“I/O” symbol 16841.2

With directional arrows 16841.3

With regulation symbol 16841.4

“I/O” symbol 16842.2

With directional arrows 16842.3

With regulation symbol 16842.4

Fixed button Blank 16843

Blank 16844 For articles in the Silver version: add .SL to the code of the article in the white version.

PLANA 2-module control device

1-module interchangeable button

2-module interchangeable button Simple button

Simple 14840

Blank 14841

“O” symbol 14841.0

“I” symbol 14841.1

Blank 14842

“O” symbol 14842.0

“I” symbol 14842.1

“I/O” symbol 14841.2

With directional arrows 14841.3

With regulation symbol 14841.4

“I/O” symbol 14842.2

Wth directional arrows 14842.3

With regulation symbol 14842.4

Fixed button Blank 14843

Blank 14844

Customizable area of the 1- and 2-module-button 14 mm

7 mm

14 mm

Halftasto top button mezzo superiore

A1 and A2: customizable area (14x7 mm).

B1 and B2: LED backlighting translucent window.

Note.

The 1 or 2 module button must always be fitted keeping the window facing the centre of the control. When selecting the pictogram you must specify whether the button is top or bottom.

Half bottom button mezzo tasto inferiore

WELL-CONTACT PLUS

Simple button

WELL-CONTACT PLUS Customization Libraries of standard lettering and symbols for buttons ( symbols already contemplated on push buttons in catalogue) EIKON 64

100

101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

138

139

140

141

142

143

144

110

111

112

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

120

121

122

123

124

125

126

127

128

129

130

131

132

133

134

135

136

137

138

139

140

141

142

143

144

145

146

147

148

149

150

151

152

153

154

155

156

157

avanti

bagno

cantina

chiude

esterno

garage

generale

giardino

indietro

luce

OFF

ripostiglio

scale

solaio

terrazza

alarm

do not disturb

108

109

110

111

112

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

120

121

122

apre

avanti

bagno

cantina

chiude

esterno

garage

generale

giardino

indietro

luce

OFF

ripostiglio

scale

solaio

terrazza

127

128

ARKÉ

IDEA

apre

PLANA

alarm

do not disturb

123

124

125

126

129

130

131

132

133

134

135

136

137

WELL-CONTACT PLUS Customization Customizing Eikon Tactil devices

WELL-CONTACT PLUS

Instructions for customisation • The controls must be customized by fixing an adhesive label (21847) in the designated areas of the device (top and bottom); • The labels contain the most common symbols for identifying the controls. Some pictograms, for the most commonly used controls in traditional and home automation electrical systems, are repeated several times (see table below); • For Well-contact Plus controls, the symbol is backlit with RGB colours to be set during system programming.

Label

Labels for customizing controls

Control customized by fixing labels

Available symbols in labels code 21847 (Some symbols are repeated)

Repetion

WELL-CONTACT PLUS Interchangeable buttons for control devices Eikon 1-module interchangeable buttons 20841 20841.0 20841.1 20841.2

.B .B .B .B

.N .N .N .N

Four interchangeable buttons, blank Four interchangeable buttons, O symbol Four interchangeable buttons, I symbol Four interchangeable buttons, I O symbol

EIKON

20841

20841.B

20841.N

20841.0

20841.0.B

20841.0.N

20841.1

20841.1.B

20841.1.N

20841.2

20841.2.B

20841.2.N

grey

white

grey

white

Arké 1-module interchangeable buttons 19841 19841.0 19841.1 19841.2

.B .B .B .B

Four interchangeable buttons, blank Four interchangeable buttons, O symbol Four interchangeable buttons, I symbol Four interchangeable buttons, I O symbol

ARKÉ

19841

19841.B

19841.0

19841.0.B

19841.1

19841.1.B

19841.2

19841.2.B

grey

white

grey

white

Idea 1-module interchangeable buttons 16841 16841.0 16841.1 16841.2

.B .B .B .B

Four interchangeable buttons, blank Four interchangeable buttons, O symbol Four interchangeable buttons, I symbol Four interchangeable buttons, I O symbol

IDEA

16841

16841.B

16841.0

16841.0.B

16841.1

16841.1.B

16841.2

16841.2.B

grey

white

grey

white

WELL-CONTACT PLUS Interchangeable buttons for control devices Eikon 1-module interchangeable buttons 20841.3 20841.4 20843

.B .B .B

.N .N .N

Four interchangeable buttons, direction arrow symbol Four interchangeable buttons, adjustment symbol Four blank interchangeable fixed buttons

20841.3

grey

20841.3.B

white

20841.3.N

20841.4

20841.4.B

20841.4.N

20843

20843.B

20843.N

19841.4

19841.4.B

19843

19843.B

16841.4

16841.4.B

16843

16843.B

grey

white

Arké 1-module interchangeable buttons 19841.3 19841.4 19843

.B .B .B

Four interchangeable buttons, direction arrow symbol Four interchangeable buttons, adjustment symbol Four blank interchangeable fixed buttons

ARKÉ

19841.3 grey

19841.3.B

white

grey

white

Idea 1-module interchangeable buttons 16841.3 16841.4 16843

.B .B .B

Four interchangeable buttons, direction arrow symbol Four interchangeable buttons, adjustment symbol Four blank interchangeable fixed buttons

IDEA

16841.3

grey

16841.3.B

white

grey

white

WELL-CONTACT PLUS

EIKON

WELL-CONTACT PLUS Interchangeable buttons for control devices Plana 1-module interchangeable buttons 14841 14841.0 14841.1 14841.2

.SL .SL .SL .SL

Four interchangeable buttons, blank Four interchangeable buttons, O symbol Four interchangeable buttons, I symbol Four interchangeable buttons, I O symbol

PLANA

14841

14841.SL

14841.0

14841.0.SL

14841.1

14841.1.SL

14841.2

14841.2.SL

14841.4

14841.4.SL

14843

14843.SL

white

Silver

white

Silver

Plana 1-module interchangeable buttons 14841.3 14841.4 14843

.SL .SL .SL

Four interchangeable buttons, direction arrow symbol Four interchangeable buttons, adjustment symbol Four blank interchangeable fixed buttons

PLANA

14841.3

white

14841.3.SL

Silver

white

Silver

WELL-CONTACT PLUS Interchangeable buttons for control devices Eikon 2-module interchangeable buttons 20842 20842.0 20842.1 20842.2

.B .B .B .B

.N .N .N .N

Two interchangeable buttons, blank Two interchangeable buttons, O symbol Two interchangeable buttons, I symbol Two interchangeable buttons, I O symbol

20842

20842.B

20842.N

20842.0

20842.0.B

20842.0.N

20842.1

20842.1.B

20842.1.N

20842.2

20842.2.B

20842.2.N

20842.4

20842.4.B

20842.4.N

20844

20844.B

20844.N

grey

white

grey

white

Eikon 2-module interchangeable buttons 20842.3 20842.4 20844

.B .B .B

.N .N .N

Two interchangeable buttons, direction arrow symbol Two interchangeable buttons, adjustment symbol Two blank interchangeable fixed buttons

EIKON

20842.3 grey

20842.3.B

white

20842.3.N

grey

white

Arké 2-module interchangeable buttons 19842 19842.0 19842.1 19842.2

.B .B .B .B

Two interchangeable buttons, blank Two interchangeable buttons, O symbol Two interchangeable buttons, I symbol Two interchangeable buttons, I O symbol

ARKÉ

19842

19842.B

19842.0

19842.0.B

19842.1

19842.1.B

19842.2

19842.2.B

grey

white

grey

white

WELL-CONTACT PLUS

EIKON

WELL-CONTACT PLUS Interchangeable buttons for control devices Arké 2-module interchangeable buttons 19842.3 19842.4 19844

.B .B .B

Two interchangeable buttons, direction arrow symbol Two interchangeable buttons, adjustment symbol Two blank interchangeable fixed buttons

ARKÉ

19842.3 grey

19842.3.B

white

19842.4

19842.4.B

19844

19844.B

grey

white

Idea 2-module interchangeable buttons 16842 16842.0 16842.1 16842.2

.B .B .B .B

Two interchangeable buttons, blank Two interchangeable buttons, O symbol Two interchangeable buttons, I symbol Two interchangeable buttons, I O symbol

IDEA

16842

16842.B

16842.0

16842.0.B

16842.1

16842.1.B

16842.2

16842.2.B

16842.4

16842.4.B

16844

16844.B

grey

white

grey

white

Idea 2-module interchangeable buttons 16842.3 16842.4 16844

.B .B .B

Two interchangeable buttons, direction arrow symbol Two interchangeable buttons, adjustment symbol Two blank interchangeable fixed buttons

IDEA

16842.3

grey

16842.3.B

white

grey

white

WELL-CONTACT PLUS Interchangeable buttons for control devices Plana 2-module interchangeable buttons 14842 14842.0 14842.1 14842.2

.SL .SL .SL .SL

Two interchangeable buttons, blank Two interchangeable buttons, O symbol Two interchangeable buttons, I symbol Two interchangeable buttons, I O symbol

14842

14842.SL

14842.0

14842.0.SL

14842.1

14842.1.SL

14842.2

14842.2.SL

14842.4

14842.4.SL

14844

14844.SL

white

Silver

white

Silver

Plana 2-module interchangeable buttons 14842.3 14842.4 14844

.SL .SL .SL

Two interchangeable buttons, direction arrow symbol Two interchangeable buttons, adjustment symbol Two blank interchangeable fixed buttons

PLANA

14842.3

white

14842.3.SL

Silver

white

Silver

WELL-CONTACT PLUS

PLANA

WELL-CONTACT PLUS Control and supervision Passive infrared presence sensor The device when activated by the IR sensor tripping (persons or animals moving through the sensor’s range of action) and/or by the light sensor, sends a message on the Bus.

Front view and connections of presence sensor Bus terminals

Technical specifications • Rated supply voltage: Bus 30 Vdc SELV • Power draw: 10 mA • Maximum range: 10 m • Connection terminals: KNX TP Bus • Operating temperature: -5°C to +45°C (indoor use)

Operation The device, whenever motion is detected, sends a message on the KNX Bus turning on the indicator LED according to the set brightness threshold (lights on/off according to the brightness in the room). The detector is also used to manage movement signals coming from any other KNX device in MASTER/SLAVE mode. The configuration of the device, physical address and parameters takes place through the ETS software. The device is able to function either as a motion detector or as a dusk/dawn sensor, depending on the set ETS parameters: it is not able to perform both functions together.

Conformity to Standards EMC directive Standards EN 50130-4, EN 50428

A B A: IR sensor B: LED C: configuration button

Presence detector coverage areas Vertical plane

1,2

B A

C B

D 1,2 0 m 0 1,5 D 0 Am = 30fasci +6 1,5 B = 6 fasci +0 A C = 35 rays -20 fasci +6 +6 B D=6 3 rays -30 fasci +0 +0 C = 5 rays fasci -20 -20 D = 3 rays fasci -30 -30

8 Portata nominale

10 10

Nominal value Portata nominale

Horizontal plane A B C A B B C B

A C A C

B B

A B

C C

8m 8m

1,5 m

Adjustable mounting frames Adjustable mounting frames for passive infrared motion detectors, 2 modules.

112 112

Detection Copertura range volumetrica -Angolo 112 horizontally • solido esplorato: Copertura volumetrica -- 36 vertically 112min. orizzontale onminimo 4 levels - 17 36 zones verticale • -Angolo solido esplorato: • Range: 10 m (8 m typically) - 17 sumax 4 piani 112settori orizzontale • Portata: 10 mminimo max (8 m tipico) - 36 verticale - 17 settori su 4 piani • Portata: 10 m max (8 m tipico)

Mounting frame - Adjustability 30

135

• allows flush mounting installation (with an adapter) in rectangular or round boxes ø 60 mm and surface mounting installation (with a frame) • the mounting frames can be arranged as shown in the figure alongside 30

Vertical orientation angle Orientabilità verticale

135

Technical specifications

Horizontal orientation angle Orientabilità orizzontale

WELL-CONTACT PLUS Control and supervision Presence detector Passive infrared presence detector, KNX standard - 2 modules 43,5

EIKON

26,5

20850.B

grey

20850.N

white

Next WELL-CONTACT PLUS

20850

44,8

ARKÉ

44,7

19,7

19850

19850.B

grey

white

IDEA

43,8 26

49,8

25,5

44,8

16850.B

16850

white

grey

PLANA

43,7

14850

14850.SL

white

Silver

Adjustable mounting frame Adjustable mounting frame – 2 modules 85,6

114

EIKON

00802.14

grey

00802

white

00802.20

Next 85,6

114

ARKÉ

00802.14 grey

00802

white 85,6

114

IDEA

16836

grey

16836.B

white 85,6

114

PLANA

00802

white

The drawings of the side views give the overall dimensions and the flush depth in mm

00802.20

Silver

WELL-CONTACT PLUS Accessories for adjustable mounting frames Adapter for fixing adjustable flush mounting frames Example of flush mounting

16830

20637

14637

20636

16836

Eikon

14636

Idea

Plana

Fixing frame for adjustable surface mounting frames Example of surface mounting

14485

20485 16831

16935 16831

20636

Eikon

16831.01

14636

16836

Idea

Plana

WELL-CONTACT PLUS Accessories for adjustable mounting frames Adapter for fixing adjustable flush mounting frames Adapter for fixing adjustable flush mounting frames 46

EIKON

36,5

grey

00805

white

00805.20

Next WELL-CONTACT PLUS

00805.14

ARKÉ

36,5

00805.14 grey

00805

white

IDEA

37,5

16830

grey 46

PLANA

36,5

00805

white

00805.20

Silver

Fixing frame for adjustable surface mounting frames Fixing frame for surface mounting

14,5

79,5

EIKON

grey

00800

white

00800.20

ARKÉ

14,5

00800.14

grey

79,5

00800.14

00800

white

IDEA

79,5

14,5

16831 grey

16831.B

white

PLANA

79,5

14,5

00800

white

The drawings of the side views give the overall dimensions and the flush depth in mm

00800.20

Silver

WELL-CONTACT PLUS Access control Touch transponder card readers for outside the room

This device, to be completed with Eikon Tactil cover plate art. 21666.., enables controlling entry with transponder cards to the rooms where it is installed outside the room. The transponder reader is provided with two relays to control the door lock, to control a courtesy light, or for other uses; the device is moreover provided with two inputs for connecting electrical equipment of the ON / OFF type (for example to control the switch for door opening and closing, a magnetic contact for signalling windows open or closed, ceiling pull alarm, etc.). On the front of the reader there are four LEDs each of which associated with an icon for signalling the following states: - Access (entry allowed or entry denied); - Guest status (room occupied or do not disturb); - Call status (rescue request with bathroom ceiling pull-cord, room service call, etc.); - Services status (make up room, etc.). In guest status, call status and services status, the colour of the LED can be set during configuration. The reader is equipped with a bell identified by a low-lit LED (if the feature is enabled to activate a timed KNX relay); in this case, too, the colour of the LED is programmable. The device is also able to signal insertion and removal of the cover plate (it switches one of its KNX communication objects ON in the event of removal). The transponder reader is able to dialogue with other EIB/KNX components. For cleaning the cover plate, simply bring near the card enabled with service access: after card recognition the bell will be disabled for 30 s. IMPORTANT: Do not install the device on the outside (for example, in a common entry to a building).

Front view

LED 1

LED 2 LED 5

LED 3 LED 4

LED STATUS • LED 1: - steady green: signalling “Entry allowed” (the LED remains illuminated for approximately 3 s). - blinking green: signalling if the timeframe is not valid (the LED blinks for approximately 3 s). - steady red: signalling “Entry denied” (the LED remains illuminated for approximately 3 s). - blinking red: signalling if the expiry date is not valid. - steady amber: signalling if the system coding is not valid. - blinking amber: signalling if the day of the week is not valid. - blinking red/green: synchronize the device's internal clock. • LED 2: signalling “Room service call.” • LED 3: signalling “Do not disturb.” • LED 4: signalling “Make up room.” • LED 5: on - identifying bell. The brightness is low and becomes high on touching the button.

Note.

The meaning taken on by the LEDs depends on the subjects of communication (therefore the functions) that are configured in the reader with the ETS software.

Connections

Configuration button

Technical specifications

• supply voltage: - Bus: 29 V SELV; - 12-24 V ~ ± 20% SELV; • Power draw: - on the bus: 10 mA - on the supplementary power supply (at 12-24 V ~): 130 mA max • Terminals: - TP bus; - supplementary power supply (12-24 V ~); - digital inputs for 2 NO or NC contacts (with no potential, SELV); - outputs for 2 NO relays (24 V~ SELV 4 A cos 1; 24 V~ SELV 2 A cos 0.6); • Operating temperature: -5 °C - +45 °C (inside) • This device contains only SELV circuits that must be kept separate from circuits with dangerous voltage.

Operation

The configuration of the reader, physical address and parameters (NO or NC contacts inputs, normal or timed relay outputs, LED colour, bell enabling, brightness of the LED associated with the bell icon, etc.) takes place via the ETS software. The card is read by putting it in front of the reader that in sequence checks: - “system code” (whether consistent); - “date” field (if enabled, it checks whether the validity has expired); - “password” (checks all the codes associated with it and enabled, such as guest code, service code, timeframes). IMPORTANT: The transponder readers should be powered separately from all other loads (electric locks, lamps, contactors, etc.) using a transformer 16887 dedicated to them whose outputs will be used solely for the readers.

LED

IN1

C NO Relay 1 C NO Relay 2

IN2

BUS line

Power supply Common inputs 1 and 2 12-24 V ~

• Configuration BUTTON: button for switching between normal mode or programming mode or detecting the physical address. • LED off: signalling "normal operation." • Red LED on steady: “addressing mode” indicator (the LED goes out automatically after programming the physical address)

Important: The length of the cable for connecting the inputs must not exceed 30 m. N.B. In the phase of installation provide for cable connection lengths that allow extracting the device from the flush mounting box so as to be able to access the configuration button. For the 12-24 V~ power supply use 12/24 Vdc power supplies or transformers with secondary winding having extra low voltage (SELV) for continuous service; do not use the voltage transformers for doorbells.

Conformity to Standards R&TTE directive Standards EN 50491, EN 50428, EN 300 330-2, EN 301 489-3

WELL-CONTACT PLUS Access control Eikon Tactil transponder card readers for outside the room Transponder card reader for installation outside rooms, KNX standard, 2 relay outputs NO 4 A 24 V~, 2 inputs, power supply 12-24 V~ 50/60 Hz and 12-24 Vdc (SELV), to be completed with Eikon Tactil transponder 3-module cover plate - 3 modules. Supplied without transponder card 40

EIKON TACTIL

WELL-CONTACT PLUS

36,5

21457

Electronic cover plate for Eikon Tactil transponders for outside the room 3-module electronic cover plate for external transponder reader, crystal

EIKON TACTIL

21666.70

diamond white

21666.73

pearl grey

The drawings of the side views give the overall dimensions and the flush depth in mm

21666.71

aqua

21666.76

diamond black

WELL-CONTACT PLUS Access control Transponder card readers for outside the room The device, with transponder cards, enables controlling entry to the rooms where it is installed externally. The transponder reader is provided with two relays to control the door lock, to control a courtesy light, or for other uses; the device is moreover provided with two inputs for connecting electrical equipment of the ON / OFF type (for example to control the switch for door opening and closing, a magnetic contact for signalling windows open or closed, ceiling pull alarm, etc.). On the front of the reader there are four LEDs each of which associated with an icon for signalling the following states: • access (entry allowed or entry denied); • guest status (room occupied or do not disturb); • call status (rescue request with bathroom ceiling pull-cord, room service call, etc.); • services status (make up room, etc.). The transponder reader is able to dialogue with other KNX components.

Technical specifications • Bus supply voltage: 30 Vdc SELV • auxiliary supply voltage: 12-24 V ± 20% SELV • consumption: 10 mA on the Bus; 130 mA max on the supplementary power supply 12-24 V • Terminals: KNX TP Bus - supplementary power supply (12-24 V ) - digital inputs for 2 NO or NC contacts (with no potential, SELV) - outputs for 2 NO relays (24 V~ SELV 4 A cos 1; 24 V~ SELV 2 A cos 0.6) • maximum distance of the input contact from the device: 30 m with twisted cable • this device contains only SELV circuits that must be kept separate from circuits with dangerous voltage • Operating temperature: -5°C - +45°C (indoor use only, do not install outside, for example in the common entry to a building).

Front view

LED STATUS LED 1: - cannot be controlled via ETS or Bus. - steady green: signalling “Entry allowed” (the LED remains illuminated for approximately 3 s). - blinking green: signalling if the timeframe is not valid (the LED blinks for approximately 3 s). - steady red: signalling “Entry denied” (the LED remains illuminated for approximately 3 s). - blinking red: signalling if the expiry date is not valid. - steady amber: signalling if the system coding is not valid - blinking amber: signalling if the day of the week is not valid. - blinking red/green: synchronize the device's internal clock. LED 2: - red: signalling "Do Not Disturb". - blinking red: signalling "Room occupied". LED 3: amber - signalling “Room service call.” LED 4: green - signalling “Make up room.”

Note.

The meaning taken on by the LEDs 2, 3 and 4 depends on the subjects of communication (therefore the functions) that are configured in the reader with the ETS software. For all the applications in which the device is configured with different functions and LED indications to the standard ones, the customer can ask Vimar to customize the symbols on the front of the reader with a laser. "Steady LED" operation has priority over its prior blinking, if any.

Connections Configuration PULSANTE configurazione BUTTON LED

Operation The configuration of the reader, physical address and parameters (NO or NC contact inputs, one-, two-position stable or timed relay outputs, etc.) is done with the ETS software. If the transponder reader is loaded with an incorrect ETS application, both the red LED on the back of the device and the front LEDs 2, 3 and 4 will blink (“device type” error). To restore the desired configuration, load the device with the correct ETS application. The card is read by putting it in front of the reader that in sequence checks: • “system code” (whether consistent); • “date and time” field (if enabled, it checks whether the validity has expired); • “password” (checks all the codes associated with it and enabled, such as guest code, service code, timeframes). The device is able to store up to 2000 cards simultaneously. With ETS it is possible to set the following parameters (can be selected directly from the graphic windows): • card information; • device configuration; • general settings; • configuration of channels; • inputs A and B; • outputs A and B.

• Configuration BUTTON: button for switching between normal mode or programming mode or detecting the physical address. • LED off: signalling “normal operation”.

Ingresso Input 1 1

C NO Relè 11 Relay C NO Relè 21 Relay

Input 2 Ingresso 2

Power supply Alimentazione 12-24 12 -24 V ~

Bus line Linea BUS

• Red LED: “addressing mode” indicator (the LED goes out automatically after programming the physical address).

Comune Common ingressi inputs e 22 1 1and

Conformity to Standards R&TTE directive Standards EN 50090-2-2, EN 50428, EN 300 330-2, EN 301 489-3

WELL-CONTACT PLUS Access control Transponder card readers for outside the room

Transponder card reader for installation outside rooms, KNX standard, 2 relay outputs NO 4 A 24 V~, 2 digital inputs, power supply 12-24 V~ 50/60 Hz and 12-24 Vdc (SELV) - 3 modules. Supplied without transponder card

EIKON

46,5

20457

grey

20457.B

white

20457.N

ARKÉ

47,1

19457

19457.B

16927

16927.B

14457

14457.SL

grey

white

IDEA

grey

white

PLANA

white

The drawings of the side views give the overall dimensions and the flush depth in mm

Silver

WELL-CONTACT PLUS

WELL-CONTACT PLUS Access control Transponder card reader with pocket for inside room The device enables checking for the presence in the room of the guest or the service staff by unambiguously identifying the transponder card inserted. The reader with pocket is provided with two relays that can be configured to control the door lock, to control a courtesy light, to optimize power consumption or for other uses too; the device is moreover provided with two inputs for connecting electrical equipment of the ON / OFF type (for example to control the switch for door opening and closing, a magnetic contact for signalling windows open or closed, ceiling pull alarm, etc.). The device is able to dialogue with other KNX components.

Front view

Illuminated pocket POCKET LIGHTING On: The card is not inserted. Off: The card is inserted. Blinking slowly or always off: The card is not recognized and therefore the functions are not activated. Blinking fast: Synchronize the device’s internal clock.

Technical specifications • Bus supply voltage: 30 Vdc SELV • auxiliary/supplementary rated supply voltage: -12-24 V ± 20% SELV • consumption: 10 mA on the Bus, 130 mA max on the supplementary power supply (at 12-24 V ) • Terminals: - TP bus - supplementary power supply (12-24 V ); - digital inputs for 2 NO or NC contacts (with no potential, SELV) - outputs for 2 NO relays (24 V~ SELV 4 A cos 1; 24 V~ SELV 2 A cos 0.6) • maximum distance of the input contact from the device: 30 m with twisted cable • this device contains only SELV circuits that must be kept separate from circuits with dangerous voltage • Operating temperature: -5°C - +45°C (indoor use only, do not install outside, for example in the common entry to a building).

Operation The configuration of the reader, physical address and parameters (NO or NC contact inputs, normal or timed relay outputs, etc.) is done with the ETS software. If the reader with a pocket is loaded with an incorrect ETS application, the pocket backlighting and the red LED on the back will blink (“device type” error). To restore the desired configuration, load the device with the correct ETS application. The card is read by putting it into the special pocket that is always illuminated when there is no card in it. After inserting the card, the device checks the following in sequence: • “system code” (whether consistent) • “date and time” field (if enabled, it checks whether the validity has expired); • “password” (checks all the codes associated with it and enabled, such as guest code, service code, timeframes). The device is able to store up to 2000 cards simultaneously.

Connections PULSANTE Configuration configurazione BUTTON LED

Configuration BUTTON: button for switching between normal mode or programming mode or detecting the physical address. LED off: signalling “normal operation”. Red LED: “addressing mode” indicator (the LED goes out automatically after programming the physical address).

Ingresso Input 1 1

C NO Relè 11 Relay C NO Relè 21 Relay

Ingresso Input 2 2

Alimentazione Power supply 12 -24 V ~ 12-24

Linea Bus line BUS

Comune Common ingressi inputs e 22 1 1and

With ETS it is possible to set the following parameters (can be selected directly from the graphic windows): • card information; • device configuration; • general settings; • configuration of channels; • inputs A and B; • outputs A and B.

Conformity to Standards R&TTE directive Standards EN 50090-2-2, EN 50428, EN 300 330-2, EN 301 489-3

WELL-CONTACT PLUS Access control Transponder card reader with pocket for inside room

Transponder card reader with vertical pocket for installation inside rooms, KNX standard, 2 relay outputs NO 4 A 24 V~, 2 digital inputs, additional power supply 12-24 V~ 50/60 Hz and 12-24 Vdc (SELV) - 3 modules

EIKON

56,5 37

grey

20453.B

white

20453.N

WELL-CONTACT PLUS

20453

ARKÉ

56,7

19453

grey

19453.B

white

IDEA

56,5 36,5

16923

grey

16923.B

white

PLANA

56,5 37

14453

white

The drawings of the side views give the overall dimensions and the flush depth in mm

14453.SL

Silver

WELL-CONTACT PLUS Access control Transponder card reader/programmer with vertical pocket in table mounting box The device enables programming and coding the transponder cards to use with the readers 20457, 16927, 14457 and the pockets 20453, 16923 and 14453 (in the respective colour variations). The reader/programmer must be connected to a personal computer on which the Well-contact Suite software must be installed for creating and managing the necessary data for the configuration of the cards according to the different requirements. The device is equipped with a cable for connecting the USB port of the PC and a backlit pocket for signalling card reading/ writing. It is mounted on a tilted desktop box and needs no driver.

Front view

Eikon

Technical specifications • power supply: from USB port (5 Vdc) • consumption: 130 mA • connection: USB 1.1 or higher cable for connection to PC • this device contains only SELV circuits that must be kept separate from circuits with dangerous voltage • Operating temperature: -5 °C - +45 °C (indoor use) • not compatible with the old Well-contact system Note The device is supplied by the PC via the USB port; therefore, in the phase of sizing the system (number of necessary power supplies), you must not take account of the consumption of the device.

Operation Programming takes place by inserting the transponder card (that can be blank or already used previously) into the reader pocket after having selected the writing command with the PC software. If, 30 s after the command, no card is inserted into the pocket, the programming command is cancelled and the PC is sent a message telling it that the device is awaiting data. The cards are read in a similar manner; the card is inserted into the pocket of the device that will read the saved data (codes, passwords, etc.) and will transmit them to the PC. The reader/programmer enables programming and/or reading the following data: • “System code” (that identifies the installation or the name of the hotel or the site where the system is installed); • “Password” (of the client or service); • “Date and time” (day/month/year).

Conformity to Standards R&TTE directive Standards EN 55022, EN 55024, EN 300 330-2, EN 301 489-3

Transponder card customizing The card can be customized on the back with colour or black and white graphics.

Technical specifications • Mifare® at 13.56 MHz (1 k ISO 14443 with 16 sectors of 64 bytes) • free memory banks for multi-applications (e.g. money) • 7 access levels (e.g., guest, service, etc.) • not compatible with the old Well-contact system

Idea

Plana POCKET LIGHTING On: the card is inserted Off the card is not inserted Blinking (for approximately 3 s): during the programming phase

Connections

WELL-CONTACT PLUS Access control Transponder card reader/programmer

Transponder card reader/programmer with vertical pocket in table mounting box, 3 modules for Idea, 4 modules for Eikon, Arké and Plana. To complete with Classica 3-module cover plate for Idea, 4 modules for Eikon (Classic and Round) and 4 modules for Plana

EIKON

74,9

88,8

grey

20450.B

white

20450.N

WELL-CONTACT PLUS

20450

ARKÉ

90,3

19450

grey

19450.B

white

IDEA

77,4

111

16920

grey

16920.B

white

PLANA

74,4

89,2

14450

white

14450.SL

Silver

Transponder card 01598

Programmable transponder card for readers inside and outside the room, customizable back (rear)

01598

The drawings of the side views give the overall dimensions and the flush depth in mm

WELL-CONTACT PLUS Temperature control KNX electronic thermostat A device for controlling ambient temperature (heating / airconditioning) in 2 or 4-pipe systems with a "boost" function according to stage and neutral zone; it can interact with other thermostats and with a supervision centre (PC with Wellcontact Suite software). It can manage 2 temperature zones completely independently (equivalent to two thermostats A and B). For each zone the heating/air-conditioning modes are managed according to the relative reference temperature. It is equipped with a relay programmable as NC or NO that can be used for general use (e.g. lighting, closing zone solenoid valve, activating electric towel warmer, etc.) or to control speed 1 of the fan coil, which is managed by thermostat A or thermostat B. It also has a digital input programmable as NC or NO, which can be used for other applications such as detecting an open window. The thermostat is equipped with an RGB display and 6 capacitive buttons for controlling the temperature set point and the speed of the fan coil, the configuration of the modes of operation of the thermostat and adjustment of the colour of the display.

Technical data power supply via KNX Bus current draw from KNX Bus

29 Vdc SELV 10 mA - ≤ ±0.5°C between +15°C and +30°C - ≤ ±0.8°C at the extremes from - 5 °C to + 45 °C (indoor use)

reading accuracy

operating temperature Inputs KNX TP Bus programmable digital input external temperature sensor (20432, 19432, 14432, 02965)

EIB + 1, 2

Outputs NO relay 24 V~ SELV 4 A cosϕ 1; 24 V~ SELV 2 A cosϕ 0.6 NC, C

02952 - Front view and connections

Operation setup button

Fan coil setting button Up/increase button

External Configuration temperature button sensor terminals KNX Bus line

Technical specifications • RGB backlit touch display with configurable colours • Possibility of connecting an external temperature NTC sensor (20432, 19432, 14432 or 02965): maximum length of the cable connecting the sensor to the devices: 60 m. Use a twisted cable with a minimum cross-section of 0.5 mm2 (01840) • Possibility of using the temperature values measured by 8 different sensors connected to the KNX Bus (DPT_Value_Temp data) • Room humidity display • Digital input for NO or NC contact (with no potential, SELV) • The maximum distance between the input contact and the thermostat is 30 m • Main functions: - room temperature set point adjustment (within the limits set by reception) - fan coil speed adjustment • this device contains only SELV circuits that must be kept separate from circuits with dangerous voltage

Configuration The configuration of the thermostat, physical address, parameters, its operation, etc., is done with the ETS software. If the thermostat is loaded with an incorrect ETS application, the red LED on the back of the device will flash and all the LCD segments will blink on the display (“device type” error). To restore the desired configuration, load the device with the correct ETS application. The user, by means of the front buttons, will be able to change the temperature set point and the speed of the fan-coil; changing these parameters forces the thermostat onto manual operation. With ETS it is possible to set the following parameters (can be selected directly from the graphic windows): • general settings • temperature sensor • temperature setpoint • setpoint temperature • input and output • adjustment • valve • fan coil speed • scenarios

Room temperature Heating

Fan-coil Ambient speed humidity

Down/ decrease button

LED Input Common input

Conformity to Standards EMC directive, Standard EN 50428, EN 50491

C NO Relay

WELL-CONTACT PLUS Temperature control KNX electronic thermostat Touch electronic thermostat for ambient temperature control (heating and air conditioning) of 2 independent zones, KNX standard home automation system, 1 NO relay output 4 A 24 V~, 1 input for electronic temperature sensor or wired temperature sensor, 1 programmable digital input, RGB LED backlighting, to be completed with Eikon, Arké or Plana cover plates - 2 modules

EIKON ARKÉ PLANA

02952

grey

The drawings of the side views give the overall dimensions and the flush depth in mm

WELL-CONTACT PLUS

26,5

02952.B

white

WELL-CONTACT PLUS Temperature control Electronic thermostat A device for controlling ambient temperature (heating / airconditioning); it can interact with other thermostats and with a supervision centre (PC with Well-contact Suite software). It can manage 2 temperature zones completely independently (equivalent to two thermostats A and B). For each zone the heating/air-conditioning modes are managed according to the relative reference temperature. It is equipped with a relay programmable as NC or NO that can be used for general use (e.g. lighting, closing zone solenoid valve, activating electric towel warmer, etc.) or to control the valve of the fan coil, which is managed by thermostat A and thermostat B. It also has a digital input programmable as NC or NO, which can be used for other applications such as detecting an open window. The device is equipped with a display and four front buttons to control the temperature set-point and the speed of the fan-coil.

made within certain limits set by the control centre or reception, etc.); • the speed of the fan-coil. To change the temperature press the + or – button twice: • on pressing it the first time the display will show the currently set temperature; • on pressing it the second time the increase/decrease in the displayed value will begin.

Technical specifications

Inputs KNX TP Bus programmable digital input

• this device contains only SELV circuits that must be kept separate from circuits with dangerous voltage • digital input for NO or NC contact (clean, SELV); max distance between the input contact and the thermostat: 30 m; • input for temperature sensor (20432, 19432, 14432); maximum length of the cable connecting the sensor to the devices: 60 m. Use a twisted cable with a minimum cross-section of 0.5 mm2 (01840) • relay output NO ( 24 V~ SELV 4 A cos 1; 24 V~ SELV 2 A cos 0.6); • temperature sensors that can be managed by the thermostat: - internal NTC - possibility of connecting an external NTC (20432, 19432, 14432) • possibility of using the temperature values measured by 8 different sensors connected to the KNX Bus • the user can manually change the setpoint using buttons A and B only in “comfort” mode.

Configuration The configuration of the thermostat, physical address, parameters, its operation, etc., is done with the ETS software. If the thermostat is loaded with an incorrect ETS application, the red LED on the back of the device will flash and all the LCD segments will blink on the display (“device type” error). To restore the desired configuration, load the device with the correct ETS application. The user, by means of the front buttons, will be able to change the temperature set point and the speed of the fan-coil; changing these parameters forces the thermostat onto manual operation. With ETS it is possible to set the following parameters (can be selected directly from the graphic windows): • general settings; • temperature sensor; • temperature setpoint; • setpoint temperature; • input and output; • adjustment; • valve; • fan coil speed; • scenarios.

Operation Using the thermostat it is possible to set: • the temperature set-point in the room (the change can only be

Technical data power supply via KNX Bus current draw from KNX Bus

30 Vdc SELV 10 mA - ≤ ±0.5°C between +15°C and +30°C - ≤ ±0.8°C at the extremes

reading accuracy clock error

- ≤ ± 1 s a day from - 5 °C to + 45 °C (indoor use)

operating temperature

EIB + 1, 2

external temperature sensor (20432, 19432, 14432) Outputs relay NO 4 A 24 V~

NO, C

Front view and connections

Configuration button

BUS line

LED

External temperature sensor terminals

OFF THERMOSTAT

Input

A B

C NO Relay Common input

C D

Button A: decrease in temperature set-point. Button B: increase in temperature set-point. Button C: selection of the thermostat to display / control (A or B) and display the temperature of the external sensor (20432, 14432) Button D: increase/decrease in the speed of the fan-coil.

Thermostat display Device locked (cannot be controlled locally)

Room temperature

Unit of measurement (Celsius/Fahrenheit)

ext

Display of the secondary thermostat (B) Air conditioning/ Heating Fan coil speed

System off Antifreeze Operating mode (Manual/Automatic)

Economy Guest out of room function (Stand-by)

Conformity to Standards EMC directive, Standard EN 50090-2-2, EN 50428

WELL-CONTACT PLUS Temperature control Electronic thermostat

Electronic thermostat for ambient temperature control (heating and air conditioning) of 2 independent zones, KNX standard, 1 NO relay output 4 A 24 V~, 1 input for temperature sensor 20432, 1 programmable digital input - 2 modules

EIKON

47,2

∆ 20430.B white

∆ 20430.N Next

ARKÉ

WELL-CONTACT PLUS

∆ 20430 grey

48 37

∆ 19430 grey

44,7

∆ 19430.B white

IDEA

47,6 36,5

16915

grey

16915.B

white

PLANA

48,3 36

∆ 14430 white

The drawings of the side views give the overall dimensions and the flush depth in mm

44,8

∆ 14430.SL Silver

∆ Available until stocks last

WELL-CONTACT PLUS Temperature control Temperature sensor

20432 - resistance / temperature graph

Device for use with centralized controller 21509 and the touch screen 21554, 21511, 21512, 20511.1, 19511 and 14511.1 to view the ambient temperature where the products are installed.

NTC_max NTC_nominale NTC_min 400 350 300

Resistenza KΩ

Technical specifications • Maximum length of cable connecting sensor to devices: 60 m

250 200 150 100

Technical data

KNX weather station The weather station integrates with the Well-contact Plus system for managing temperature control, energy and automation systems. The KNX weather station measures quantities such as temperature, wind speed, rainfall, and brightness whose values can be used, based on the limits, to control the device control outputs; the states can then be associated with each other by using the AND and OR logic gates of the weather station.

Main functions: • Brightness measurement: this function can be used to turn on the outside lights at dusk and turn them off at dawn. • Wind measurement: the strength of the wind is measured electronically and is therefore quiet and reliable even in the event of hail, snow and sub-zero temperatures. The weather station is also able to detect whirlwinds and updraughts. This function activates awning rewinding in windy conditions or when there is precipitation. • Rainfall measurement: the weather station is equipped with a sensor with a heated surface so that only the raindrops and snowflakes (and therefore not fog or dew) are measured as precipitation. In case of rain, you can disable automatic irrigation. Once it has stopped raining or snowing, the sensor dries quickly and the precipitation message is turned off. • Temperature measurement: the weather station measures the value of the current ambient temperature. • Control outputs for all values: the limit values can be set via the respective parameters or via the ETS communication objects. • 8 AND logic gates and 8 OR logic gates each one with 4 inputs: the control operations themselves as well as the 8 logic inputs (in the form of communication objects) can be used as inputs for the AND and OR logic gates; the output of each gate can be configured as 1 bit or as 2 x 8 bits.

Technical specifications • Configuration button; • CONFIGURATION LED; • Protection class: IP44; • dimensions: 96x77x118 mm (W x H x D); • Weight: approximately 170 g.

Configuration The weather station functions and parameters are configured via the ETS software; the program file (in VD format), the manual and the technical info sheet are available for download in the Software>Product Software section of the website www.vimar.com.

Bus 29 Vdc 42 mA 15 mW from - 40 °C to + 125 °C

-50

100

150

Temperatura °C

Technical data AUX power supply current draw max, ripple 10% group addresses possible associations communication objects rain sensor heating temperature measurement range temperature definition temperature accuracy wind measurement range wind definition wind accuracy with an angle of incidence of 45° and mounting on dedicated support brightness measurement range brightness definition

brightness accuracy operating temperature Inputs power supply Bus

12-32 V , 12-24 V~ SELV 100 mA 254 max 255 max 109 1.2 W from -40°C to 80°C 0.1°C 1°C with -10°C - +85°C 1.5°C with -25°C - +150°C 0 - 70 m/s <10% of the reading 25% with 0 - 15 m/s 0 - 150,000 Lux 1 Lux with 0-120 Lux 2 Lux with 121-1,046 Lux 63 Lux with 1,047-52,363 Lux 423 Lux with 52,364-150,000 Lux 35% from -30°C to + 50°C (outdoor use) +, TP bus;

Conformity to Standards EMC directive, Standard EN60730-1, EN 50491

01546 - Connections

L N

Bus +, -

L N

01500

AUX 12-32 Vdc 12-24 Vac

01890

resistance current draw dissipated power operating temperature

AUX +,-

Bus +,-

AUX power supply unit: KNX power supply unit: art. 01830 art. 01500 or transformer: art. 16887

WELL-CONTACT PLUS Temperature control Temperature sensor Electronic temperature sensor, 1 output

EIKON

22,3

20432 grey

20432.B

white

20432.N

ARKÉ

35,2 24,4

19432

grey

WELL-CONTACT PLUS

34,7 24,4

22,2

19432.B

white

PLANA

34,7 22,3

23,4

14432

white

14432.SL

Silver

Weather station 01546

Weather station, KNX standard, power supply 12-32 Vdc or 12-24 Vac

Installation

Base with cable ties supplied

 01546

Wired temperature sensor Wired temperature sensor, cable length 4 m

02965 The drawings of the side views give the overall dimensions and the flush depth in mm

WELL-CONTACT PLUS System components 01521 - Actuator for fluorescent lamps The actuator is able to activate electrical applications (alternating or three-phase current) via 12 independent potential-free contacts; control is via the Bus or via the dedicated manually operated switches. The devices are powered by the KNX Bus and do not require an external power supply.

01521 - Front view and connections

Technical specifications • Bus output voltage: 30 Vdc SELV • power outputs: 12 Floating contacts • switch voltage: 250/440 V ~ • rated current: 10AX EN 60669; 10A (AC1) EN 60947-4 • operating temperature: -5 °C - + 45 °C (inside) • protection rating: IP20 • 12 modules of 17,5 mm

VIMAR 01521

250/440 V 10 AX

Operation The physical address and the parameter settings are set using the Engineering Tool Software ETS. Programming LED Lights up red when the device is operated in programming mode (after pressing the Programming button).

1: Label carrier 2: Programming key 3: Programming LED, red 4: Connecting terminal KNX 5: Switch position display and ON/OFF operation 6: Load current circuit, each with 2 screw terminals

Conformity to Standards LV directive, EMC Directive, Standard EN 50090-2-2

01525 - Actuator for 8 roller shutters The actuator for shutters/Venetian blinds controls independent drives at 230 V~ for sunblind applications via the KNX Bus and it is also possible to control ventilators, doors and windows. The devices are bus-powered and do not require an external auxiliary power supply; the output contacts are electro-mechanically interlocked in such a way as to protect the drives from any damage.

01525 - Front view

Technical specifications • Bus output voltage: 30 Vdc SELV • independent outputs each for up to 2 drives in parallel operation • rated voltage UN: 230 V ~ 50/60 Hz • rated current IN: 6 A • operating temperature: -5 °C - + 45 °C (inside) • protection rating: IP20 • 8 modules of 17,5 mm

Operation

1: Bus connecting terminal 2: Programming key 3: Programming LED (red)

4: Label carrier 5: Connection terminals  and 

The physical address and the parameter settings are set using the Engineering Tool Software ETS. Programming LED Lights up red when the device is operated in programming mode (after pressing the Programming button).

Conformity to Standards

Connection for rolling shutter and venetian blind drives

Connection for ventilators/switch function

LV directive, EMC Directive, Standard EN 50090-2-2

WELL-CONTACT PLUS System components Actuator for fluorescent lamps Actuator with 12 10 A 250 V~ 50/60 Hz relay outputs for fluorescent lamps, KNX standard, installation on DIN rail (60715 TH35), occupies 12 17,5 mm modules

WELL-CONTACT PLUS

01521

Actuator for 8 roller shutters 01525

Actuator for 8 roller shutters, 6 A 230 V~ 50/60 Hz relay outputs, KNX standard, installation on DIN rail (60715 TH35), occupies 8 17,5 mm modules

01525

The drawings of the side views give the overall dimensions and the flush depth in mm

WELL-CONTACT PLUS System components 01544 - KNX DALI gateway The gateway enables controlling DALI devices (eg electronic ballasts, transformers, etc.). It is equipped with 8 independent channels on which you can connect up to 16 DALI devices per channel; for individual channels or all the channels you can enable your choice of switching functions, dimming, fixed value, fault signalling, Lamp stabilization time, and functions relating to lighting scenarios. There is no need for separate DALI start-ups or manually assigning addresses for DALI devices.

Technical specifications • Operating voltage: 85-265 V ~ 50/60 Hz, 110-240 Vdc • DALI outputs: 8 in compliance with IEC 60929 • Number DALI devices: Max. 16 per output • Line length:Max. 300 m (line cross-section 1,5 mm2) • Operating temperature: -5 °C - + 45 °C (inside) • Protection rating: IP20 • 6 modules of 17,5 mm

Operation No special commissioning is necessary for the DALI devices. After connection of the operating voltage, the DALI Gateway automatically recognises the DALI operating devices connected. The assignment of the physical address and the setting of the parameters are performed with the ETS. Programming LED Lights up red when the device is operated in programming mode (after pressing the Programming button).

Conformity to Standards LV directive, EMC Directive, Standard EN 50090-2-2

01547 - KNX IP interface The IP/KNX interface enables the switching of KNX telegrams in IP telegrams on Ethernet network. The data can be exchanged between KNX system and IP network.

Technical specifications • operating voltage: - Bus: 30 Vdc SELV - additional: 12-30 Vdc, 12-24 V~ • consumptions: - on the Bus: 5 mA - additional power supply: 190 mA • terminals: - TP Bus - additional power supply - IP RJ45 connector 10/100 BaseT, IEEE 802.3 • operating temperature: -5 °C - + 45 °C (inside) • protection rating: IP20 • 2 modules of 17,5 mm

Operation The assignment of the physical address and the setting of the parameters are performed with the ETS.

Conformity to Standards EMC Directive Standard EN 50090-2-2

01544 - Front view and connections L3 L2 L1 N PE

max. 16 EVG

DA- DA+ DA- DA+

9 Us = 85 ... 265 V ~ 110 ... 240 V

1 2 3

1: Nameplate support 2: KNX Programming key 3: KNX Programming LED, red 4: KNX Connecting terminal 5: DALI LED, yellow

DALI

6: Operating LED, green 7: Operating voltage 8: DALI outputs, 2 screw terminals each 9: TEST key

WELL-CONTACT PLUS System components KNX DALI gateway KNX DALI gateway, 8-channel for 16 lamps per channel, installation on DIN (60715 TH35) rail, occupies 6 17,5 mm modules

WELL-CONTACT PLUS

01544

KNX IP interface 01547

KNX IP interface, installation on DIN (60715 TH35) rail, occupies 2 17,5 mm modules

01547

The drawings of the side views give the overall dimensions and the flush depth in mm

WELL-CONTACT PLUS System components 01510 - Device with 4 programmable digital inputs This device enables managing 4 digital inputs for typical applications in the tertiary sector (entry to offices, hospital or hotel rooms, swimming pools, saunas, sports facilities, reserved spaces, etc.). The device is equipped with 4 ON/OFF inputs.

Technical specifications • supply voltage: Bus 30 Vdc SELV • Power draw: 10 mA • Dissipated power: 0.5 W • 4 digital inputs for NO or NC contacts (120/230 V~, 50/60 Hz) • Terminals: - TP Bus - digital inputs • maximum distance of the input contact from the device: 30 m with twisted cable • Operating temperature: -5 °C - +45 °C (indoor use) • 2 modules of 17.5 mm IMPORTANT: The device does not accept clean contacts.

- management of short/long pressure on a control button; - dimmer control; - roller shutter control; • functions with 2 associated channels: - dimmer control; - roller shutter control.

Conformity to Standards LV directive, EMC Directive, Standard 50090-2-2, EN 50428 01510 - Front view and connections

Configuration The configuration of the device, physical address and parameters (NO or NC contacts inputs, etc.) takes place through the ETS software. If the 4 input device is loaded with an incorrect ETS application, the red LED will flash (“device type” error). To restore the desired configuration, load the device with the correct ETS application.

INPUT

IN 1

IN 2

IN 3

IN 4

The device can be used in two different modes: • functions on a single channel: - ON/OFF switch on the up or down side, toggle on the up or down side, status send and value send; - call up scenario and save scenario; - counter with 8, 16 and 32 bits;

01523 - Actuator with 4 relay outputs NO 16 A 250 V~

This device enables managing 4 generic outputs for typical applications in the tertiary sector (entry to offices, hospital or hotel rooms, swimming pools, saunas, sports facilities, reserved spaces, etc.). The device is equipped with 4 relay outputs of 16 A 250 V~ and has manual control for local implementation. The configuration of the device, physical address and parameters (normal or timed relay outputs, logical interlocking of the four relay outputs, etc.) takes place through the ETS software.

Conformity to Standards

LV directive, EMC Directive, Standard 50090-2-2, EN 50428

4 INPUT 120/230 V~ 50/60 Hz

EIB - +

INPUT TERMINALS 1: digital input 1 2: digital input 2 3: digital input 3 4: digital input 4 C: common

Linea Bus

01523 - Front view and connections

C C NO OUT 1

C C NO OUT 2

C C NO OUT 3

01523 4 OUTPUT µ 16A 250V˜

Technical specifications

• Rated supply voltage: Bus 30 Vdc SELV • Power draw: 10 mA • Dissipated power: 4 W • relay outputs 16 A 250 V~ • controllable loads at 250 V~: - resistive loads: 16 A (20,000 cycles) - incandescent lamps: 10 A (20,000 cycles) - fluorescent lamps and energy saving lamps: 1 A (20,000 cycles) - electronic transformers: 4 A (20,000 cycles) - ferromagnetic transformers: 10 A (20,000 cycles) - cos ø 0.6 motors: 3.5 A (100,000 cycles) • Terminals: - TP Bus - relay contacts (C, NO) • relay configuration: one- or two-position stable • Operating temperature: -5 °C - +45 °C (indoor use) • 4 modules of 17.5 mm

01510

CONF.

Operation

LED A: LED for state of input 1 B: LED for state of input 2 C: LED for state of input 3 D: LED for state of input 4 E: LED and button for configuration

C C NO OUT 4

OUT 1

OUT 2

OUT 3

OUT 4

D E

CONF. EIB

linea Bus

LED A: LED and button to activate relay 1 B: LED and button to activate relay 2 C: LED and button to activate relay 3 D: LED and button to activate relay 4 E: LED and configuration button F: button for switching to manual mode

TERMINALS OUT 1: relay output 1 OUT 2: relay output 2 OUT 3: relay output 3 OUT 4: relay output 4

WELL-CONTACT PLUS System components Device with 4 programmable digital inputs Device with 4 programmable digital inputs for NO, NC contacts, 120-230 V~, KNX standard, installation on DIN rail (60715 TH35), occupies 2 modules size 17.5 mm

WELL-CONTACT PLUS

01510

Actuator with 4 relay outputs NO 16 A 250 V~ 01523

Actuator with 4 relay outputs NO 16 A 250 V~, KNX standard, installation on DIN rails (60715 TH35), occupies 4 modules size 17.5 mm

01523

WELL-CONTACT PLUS System components 01522 - Input/output device This device enables managing 4 inputs and 4 generic outputs for typical applications in the tertiary sector (entry to offices, hospital or hotel rooms, swimming pools, saunas, sports facilities, reserved spaces, etc.). The device is equipped with 4 ON/OFF inputs and 4 relay outputs of 16 A 250 V~ and has manual control for local implementation.

Technical specifications • supply voltage: Bus 30 Vdc SELV • Power draw: 10 mA • Dissipated power: 4 W • 4 digital inputs for NO or NC contacts (with no potential, SELV) • relay outputs 16 A 250 V~ • controllable loads at 250 V~: - resistive loads: 16 A (20,000 cycles) - incandescent lamps: 10 A (20,000 cycles) - fluorescent lamps and energy saving lamps: 1 A (20,000 cycles); and electronic transformers: 4 A (20,000 cycles) - ferromagnetic transformers: 10 A (20,000 cycles) - cos 0.6 motors: 3.5 A (100,000 cycles) • Terminals: - TP bus - relay contacts (C, NO) - digital inputs • relay configuration: one- or two-position stable • maximum distance of the input contact from the device: 30 m with twisted cable • Operating temperature: -5 °C - +45 °C (indoor use) • 4 modules of 17.5 mm

01522 - Front view and connections

C C NO C C NO C C NO C C NO OUT 1

IN 1

IN 2

IN 3

IN 4

OUT 2

OUT 3

OUT 4

OUT 1

OUT 2

OUT 3

01522 4 IN / 4OUT µ 16A 250V˜

E IN 1

IN 2

IN 3

IN 4

OUT 4

CONF.

EIB

Linea Bus

LED A: state of input 1 B: state of input 2 C: state of input 3 D: state of input 4 E: button for switching to manual mode F: LED and button to activate relay 1 G LED and button to activate relay 2 H LED and button to activate relay 3 I LED and button to activate relay 4 L LED and configuration button

TERMINALS OUT 1: relay output 1 OUT 2: relay output 2 OUT 3: relay output 3 OUT 4: relay output 4 IN 1: 1 common and 1 digital input IN 2: 1 common and 1 digital input IN 3: 1 common and 1 digital input IN 4: 1 common and 1 digital input

Conformity to Standards LV Directive, EMC Directive Standards EN 50090-2-2, EN 50428

01524 - Actuator for two roller shutters Device to control 2 roller shutters, motorized sunblinds and Venetian blinds with adjustable slats. The device is equipped with 2 relay outputs of 16 A 250 V~ and has manual control for local implementation.

01524 - Front view and connections 







Technical specifications • Rated supply voltage: Bus 30 Vdc SELV • Power draw: 10 mA • Dissipated power: 4 W • relay outputs 16 A 250 V~ • controllable loads at 250 V~: - cos ø 0.6 motors: 3.5 A (100,000 cycles) • Terminals: - TP bus - relay contacts: 2 (, , NO) - : closed if you press the button  - : closed if you press the button  - C: common • Operating temperature: -5 °C - +45 °C (indoor use) • 4 modules of 17.5 mm

C OUT 2

OUT 1

01524

OUT 1

BLIND ACTUATOR µ 16A 250V˜

OUT 2

CONF. EIB

Conformity to Standards LV Directive, EMC Directive Standards EN 50090-2-2, EN 50428

Bus line LED A: LED and buttons to activate relay 1 B: LED and buttons to activate relay 2 C: LED and configuration button D: button for switching to manual mode

TERMINALS OUT 1: relay output 1 OUT 2: relay output 2

WELL-CONTACT PLUS System components Input/output device Input/output device, 4 relay outputs NO 16 A 250 V~, 4 inputs for NO contacts, KNX standard, installation on DIN rails (60715 TH35), occupies 4 modules size 17,5 mm

WELL-CONTACT PLUS

01522

Actuator for two roll-up blinds 01524

Actuator for 2 roller shutters with relay outputs 16 A 250 V~, KNX standard, installation on DIN rails (60715 TH35), occupies 4 modules size 17,5 mm

01524

WELL-CONTACT PLUS System components 01528 - Dimmer 1-10 V

Conformity to Standards

The dimmer is used to control and adjust the brightness of light circuits via the KNX Bus. The device has 2 independent channels; for each channel there is a ground potential contact to control the power circuits. Together with the light sensor 01530, the appliance can be used as a constant brightness dimmer. The dimmer can be connected with up to 2 light sensors. The dimming telegrams are converted into 0…10 V signals corresponding to the brightness 0…100%. Art. 01528 works passively, that is the outputs 1…10 V behave as controlled resistors and the connected electronic ballasts (EVG) provide the current. With the exception of the KNX bus voltage, the dimmer requires no external power supply; the setting of the nominal rating for the light dimmer can be performed separately for each channel or as a MASTER / SLAVE combination. N.B. If you do not use sensors 01530, it is necessary to exclude their control from the ETS parameters of the dimmer 01528.

LV Directive, EMC Directive Standard EN 50090-2-2

01528 - Front view and connections

7 6

BALLAST

Technical specifications • supply voltage: Bus 30 Vdc SELV • Dissipated power: 250 mW • switchover outputs: 2 clean contacts • cut-in voltage: 250/440 V~, 50/60 Hz • peak current at cut-in: 400 A (150 μs)/320 A (250 μs)/200 A (600 μs) • control outputs: 2, passive 1.... 10 V • connectable load: 100 mA per command output (max 100 m with 1.5 mm² cable, max 70 m with 0.8 mm² cable) • controllable load: up to a maximum of 50 ballasts • LED loads can be controlled only if equipped with driver 1...10 V • Operating temperature: +5 °C - + 45 °C (inside) • protection class IP20 • 4 modules of 17.5 mm

01530 - Brightness sensor The device detects the brightness in the room and, through the connection with the KNX dimmer 01528, keeps the level of brightness in the rooms constant, combining the natural light and the artificial light, thus obtaining the greatest savings and optimizing energy consumptions. It must be installed in a standard box and fixed with a cover using screws.

Technical specifications • inputs for light sensor 01530: 2 • adjustment range: optimized on the typical value of 500 lux You can make 2 sensors 01530 work on the same OUT as 01528 to which they are connected, and maybe use the other OUT as a normal dimmer without the brightness control.

Conformity to Standards EMC directive Standard EN 50090-2-2

5 1 3 2 4

8 9

1: identification plate 2: configuration button 3: Red configuration LED 4: Bus connection terminals 5: operating status and manual operation ON/OFF (if set to "1" it no longer considers the Bus commands) 6: power circuit 7: control circuits 1....10 V 8: light sensor inputs 01530 9: light sensor 01530

01530 – Assembly diagram

WELL-CONTACT PLUS System components Dimmer Dimmer, 2 inputs for 01530, 2 relay outputs NO 16 A 250 V~, 2 outputs 1-10 V, KNX standard, installation on DIN rails (60715 TH35), occupies 4 modules size 17.5 mm

WELL-CONTACT PLUS

01528

Brightness sensor 01530

Brightness sensor for dimmer 01528, for ceiling installation

01530

WELL-CONTACT PLUS System components 01529 - IR presence detector The detector enables controlling and adjusting lighting and/or HVAC systems depending on brightness and/or movement. The device is for use solely in enclosed spaces such as, for example, offices, schools or private buildings; it cannot be used as an anti-intrusion detector as it is not equipped with anti-tampering.

01529 - Front view

Technical specifications • Bus output voltage: 24 Vdc, <12 mA • switch-on time after switch-off (programmable): 1 s • adjustable brightness range: 1-1000 lux • opening angle for brightness measurement: 60° • operating temperature: -5 °C - + 45 °C (inside) • protection rating: IP20

1 1: Red configuration LED under zone C of the lens 2: Programming button A, B, C, D: Sectors that can be individually deactivated

01529 - Rear view

Conformity to Standards

LV directive, EMC Directive, Standard EN 60669-2-1

2 4 1 1: Interface for commissioning adaptor (Updates) 5-pole update cable required 2: Bus connection KNX 3: Retaining clamps for enclosed support ring 4: Label area for physical address

WELL-CONTACT PLUS System components IR presence detector IR presence detector, 360° motion range, for lightings depending on the brightness, 0-100 Lux adjustable brightness range, KNX standard, for ceiling installation

WELL-CONTACT PLUS

01529

Adapter for IR presence detector 01529.S

Adapter for 01529 IR presence detector with brightness sensor for ceiling installation

01529.S

The drawings of the side views give the overall dimensions and the flush depth in mm

WELL-CONTACT PLUS System components 01515 - Interface with 4 programmable channels

Conformity to Standards

The device is equipped with 4 channels that can be configured as inputs or outputs with the ETS software. The connecting cables with pins approximately 30 cm long permit connecting conventional controls, contacts with zero potential and LEDs. The contact interrogation voltage and the supply voltage for the LEDs are available on the device. The additional resistors for the external light emitting diodes are integrated in the same device. The connection to the Bus is made with the terminal block for connection to the Bus.

EMC directive Standards EN 50090-2-2 01515 - Front view and connections C

Technical specifications • Rated supply voltage: Bus 30 Vdc SELV • inputs/outputs: 4 configurable as input or output • input: - detection voltage: 20 V pulsating - input current: 0.5 mA • output: - supply voltage: 3...5 Vdc - output current: max 2 mA limited by additional resistors (to control LED 5 V, 2 mA) • protection against overload and polarity reversal • terminals: - TP bus; - terminal block with 6 connection cables 30 cm long • inputs for voltage free contacts • protection class: IP20 • Operating temperature: -5 °C - +45 °C (indoor use)

Operation The configuration of the device, physical address and parameters takes place through the ETS software.

01526 – Dimmer 230 V~ 50/60 Hz The dimmer is able to control two groups of lamps, each with a maximum power of 300 W. The device has two independent output channels; if only one channel is in operation, the connected power increases up to 500 W. Thanks to the low minimum power of 2 W, the dimmer is suited for connecting different types of lamps. Operation is possible of incandescent lamps, 230 V halogen lamps or low-voltage halogen lamps connected to electronic or conventional transformers. The type of load is identified automatically if this is set in the parameters. The two channels are independent and can be connected to different phases and serve different types of load. The configuration of the device, physical address and parameters takes place through the ETS software.

01515

A: Red LED and configuration button B: inputs/outputs: 6 conductors with pin C: Bus connection terminals Terminals: 1: common terminal when driving a LED with contacts 1-2-3-4 2: common terminal when connecting a key/button with contacts 1-2-3-4 3: IN/OUT 1 4: IN/OUT 2 5: IN/OUT 3 6: IN/OUT 4

01526 - Front view and connections

1 2

01526

Technical specifications • supply voltage: Bus 30 Vdc SELV • power consumption: 4.5 W • output power: 300 W/VA (max 500 W if only one channel is used) • minimum load: 2 W • terminals: - TP bus; - phase 1, neutral, load 1 - phase 2, neutral, load 2 • Operating temperature: -5 °C - + 45 °C (inside) • protection class: IP20 • 4 modules of 17.5 mm N.B. Device is not suitable for controlling fluorescent, neon or LED loads.

Conformity to Standards LV Directive, EMC Directive Standards EN 50090-2-2, EN 50428

3 4 5

1: power supply: possibility of connecting separate phases 2: input/output terminals for connection to the load 3: identification plate 4: Red LED and configuration button 5: Bus connection terminals

WELL-CONTACT PLUS System components Interface with 4 programmable channels Interface with 4 channels that can be programmed as inputs or outputs for LEDs, KNX standard

WELL-CONTACT PLUS

01515

Dimmer 230 V~ 50/60 Hz 01526

Dimmer 230 V~ 50/60 Hz for 2x300 W incandescent lamps, 2x300 VA ferromagnetic transformers, 2x300 VA electronic transformers, KNX standard, installation on DIN rails (60715 TH35), occupies 4 modules size 17.5 mm

01526

WELL-CONTACT PLUS System components 01500 - Power supply with 30 Vdc Bus output Power supply unit for bus systems equipped with decoupling coil. If there are 30 or more Bus devices installed near to each other (for instance in 10-15 m of cable or in the same electric panel), it is advisable to install the power unit near to these devices. The maximum distance between the power supply unit and the furthest device must not exceed 350 m. The power unit is selfprotected against short circuits (thanks to a voltage and current dimmer) and ensures a power supply even in the event of brief mains failures provided they do not exceed 200 ms. It is recommended to always have a safety switch for the electric power supply circuit of the device 01500.

connection terminals and, after approximately 20 seconds, put them back in place. The Bus line is connected to the power supply again and the Bus devices return to their predefined initial conditions.

01500 - Front view and connections 3

01500

Technical specifications • supply voltage: 230 V~ 50/60 Hz ± 10% • Power draw: 200 mA max • Dissipated power: 4 W • Bus output voltage: 30 Vdc SELV • total max output current: 320 mA • short-circuit current: 1 A • Operating temperature: -5 °C - + 45 °C (inside) • 4 modules of 17.5 mm

Connections The connection to the Bus is made directly from the Bus terminals on the front of the device. The power unit must be installed so that the text is clearly visible and correctly decipherable (Bus polarity reversal). To “Reset” the power unit, remove the bus

01501.1 - Power supply with 30 Vdc Bus output Power supply unit for bus systems equipped with decoupling coil. Each bus line needs at least one power unit; if the voltage on the bus is less than 21 V it is necessary to install a second power unit at a distance of at least 200 m from the first one. If there are 30 or more bus devices installed near to each other (for instance in 10-15 m of cable or in the same electric panel), it is advisable to install the power unit near to these devices. The maximum distance between the power unit and the furthest device must not exceed 350 m. The power unit is moreover equipped with an auxiliary output that supplies a voltage of 30 Vdc that can be used to connect an additional bus line via a decoupling coil. The power unit is self-protected against short circuits (thanks to a voltage and current dimmer) and ensures a power supply even in the event of brief mains failures provided they do not exceed 200 ms. It is recommended to always have a safety switch for the electric power supply circuit of the device 01501.1.

Technical specifications • supply voltage: 85 ÷ 265 V~ 50/60 Hz • power consumption: 55 W max • power loss: 4 W • Bus output voltage: 30 Vdc SELV • auxiliary output voltage: 30 Vdc SELV • total max output current: 640 mA • operating temperature: -5 °C - +45 °C (inside) • short-circuit current: 1,4 A • protection rating: IP20 • 4 modules of 17,5 mm

1: LED ON: "normal operation" indicator 2: identification plate 3: power supply terminals: mains 230 V~ 4: Bus connection terminals

01501.1 - Front view

1--> Two-color LED green/red 2--> Identification plate 3--> Bus connection terminals 4--> Terminals for connection to the auxiliary output: 30 Vdc 5--> Power supply terminals: mains 85 ÷ 265 V~

WELL-CONTACT PLUS System components Power supply unit with 30 Vdc Bus output Power supply unit with Bus output of 30 Vdc 320 mA, power supply 120/230 V~ 50/60 Hz, with decoupling coil, KNX standard, installation on DIN rail 60715 TH35, occupies 4 modules of 17.5 mm

WELL-CONTACT PLUS

01500

Power supply unit with 30 Vdc Bus output 01501.1

Power supply unit with Bus output of 30 Vdc 640 mA, auxiliary output 30 Vdc, power supply 85 ÷ 265 V~ 50/60 Hz, with decoupling coil, KNX standard, installation on DIN RAIL 60715 TH35, occupies 4 modules size 17,5 mm

01501.1

WELL-CONTACT PLUS System components 01504.1 - 01504 - Line coupler This device permits connecting a number of Bus lines together in order to share and/or transfer the data messages; in addition, it provides electrical separation between the lines and filtering of unnecessary messages. The device manages filter tables that are used to block or let messages pass between the various lines limiting and optimizing the data traffic; these tables are created automatically by the ETS software. The line/field coupler can be used irrespectively as a line coupler, field coupler or repeater for all KNX networks.

01504.1 - Front view

1 2 3

Technical specifications • supply voltage: - 01504: 30 Vdc SELV - 01504.1: 21-30 Vdc SELV Note: The device must be powered on both sides • Power draw: 10 mA • Operating temperature: +5 °C - +45 °C (indoor use) • 2 modules of 17,5 mm

Conformity to Standards EMC directive Standards EN 50090-2-2

8 7 6 5

1: LED ON: "normal operation" indicator 2: Main Line LED: data transit on the main line 3: Line LED: data transit on the secondary line 4: terminals for connection to the Bus of the main line 5: terminals for connection to the Bus of the secondary line 6: Configuration LED 7: configuration button: button for switching between normal mode or programming mode or detecting the physical address 8: identification plate

WELL-CONTACT PLUS System components Line coupler Line coupler, KNX standard, installation on DIN rail (60715 TH35), occupies 2 modules of 17.5 mm

WELL-CONTACT PLUS

01504.1

Line coupler ∆ 01504

Line coupler, KNX standard, installation on DIN rail (60715 TH35), occupies 2 modules of 17.5 mm

∆ 01504

∆ Available until stocks last

WELL-CONTACT PLUS System components 01540 - USB interface type B This device is used, via the built-in USB port, to connect a personal computer to the Bus line (or Bus lines) to configure, address, parameterize, display, record and diagnose all the components of the Bus system. The interface is connected to the PC via the USB port (type B) built into the device and any USB port (type A) of the personal computer or of a HUB. The interface is powered by the PC over the USB cable; if this is not connected or the personal computer is switched off, the interface is not active and cannot be accessed by the Bus. In addition, the USB interface enables connecting the reception PC for the complete supervision and management of the system with the Well-contact Suite software. Note. The USB cable (type A on the PC side and type B on the interface side) is not provided.

Technical specifications • supply voltage: Bus 30 Vdc SELV • consumption: 10 mA • Operating temperature: -5 °C - + 45 °C (inside) • 2 modules of 17.5 mm

Conformity to Standards EMC directive Standard EN 50090-2-2

01540 - Front view and connections

7 01540

6 5 2

° °

1. identification plate 2. button for switching between normal mode or programming mode or detecting the physical address 3. Configuration LED 4. Bus connection terminals 5. USB LED: data transmission/reception on the USB port 6. KNX LED: data transmission/reception on the Bus 7. USB port INDICATORS LED 3 on red: “addressing mode” indicator (the LED goes out automatically after programming the physical address) LED 3 off: "normal operation" indicator USB LED on green: “USB connected” indicator KNX LED flashing green: "data in transit on the Bus line" indicator

Conformity to Standards

Transformer in a modular enclosure (3 modules size 17.5 mm) compatible with DIN rail (60715 TH35).

LV directive Standard 61558-2-8

• power supply: 230 V~ 50 Hz • maximum usable power on output 24 V~: 24 VA • maximum usable power on output 12 V~: 12 VA • can be installed on DIN rail (60715 TH35) • 3 modules of 17.5 mm

3 4

16887 - Transformer for DIN rail (60715 TH35)

Technical specifications

WELL-CONTACT PLUS System components USB interface type B USB interface type B, KNX standard, installation on DIN rail (60715 TH35), occupies 2 modules of 17.5 mm

WELL-CONTACT PLUS

01540

Safety transformer 16887

Safety transformer 230/12-24 V~ (SELV) 24 VA, for continuous service, installation on DIN (60715 TH35) rail, it occupies 3 modules size 17.5 mm, grey RAL 7035

16887

Bus cable 01890

Cable 2x2x0.8 mm, free of LSZH halogens, KNX standard, green - 100 m

01890

The drawings of the side views give the overall dimensions and the flush depth in mm

WELL-CONTACT PLUS Well-contact Suite software Well-contact Suite (WCS) Software To manage and supervise the Well-contact Plus system, Vimar has created a family of software products to try and satisfy the requests of the different types of systems of its customers. The following table lists the six types of application. Light: to manage a structure with up to 15 rooms from a single station. Thanks to 5 password levels, control can be customized: the manager of the structure, for example, can access the complete system to supervise, edit the parameters and program the functions, while the receptionist with another password will only access some of these operations.

WCS Top

WCS Basic

WCS Client

WCS Top

WCS Office

WCS Office Client

WCS Client

WCS Office

Basic: to manage a structure with up to 50 rooms from a single station. Thanks to 5 password levels, control can be customized: the manager of the structure, for example, can access the complete system to supervise, edit the parameters and program the functions, while the receptionist with another password will only access some of these operations. It can be interfaced with at most one WCS Client 01592 Top: to control large hotels with a potentially limitless number of rooms and stations. This application has 7 password levels and makes it possible to use the planner for supervising arrivals and departures. It can be interfaced with countless WCS Client 01592 stations

The main characteristic of the Well-contact Suite software is to automatically create graphic windows in the supervision section. These windows show all the rooms in the hospitality facility with graphic symbols representing the main functions of the automation system devices in the rooms. The rooms are divided according to their use: rooms, common areas, technical areas. For each type of room there are one or more of the following “theme views.” A theme view is a representation of the room highlighting a particular function of the devices in the room. The “theme views” envisaged in the Well-contact Suite software comprise: • the “thermostats” view • the “Guest in room” view • the “windows opening status” view • the “room cleaning status” view

Client: application licence enabling you to manage the Basic and Top systems from a limitless number of stations.

Besides the theme views, a “summary view” is created automatically, in which the room’s main data are shown.

WCS Basic

WCS Top

WCS Basic

Office: dedicated to offices and business structures, it enables managing the functions of a potentially limitless number of rooms from one station. With 7 password levels, control can be targeted and secure. It can be interfaced with countless WCS Client Office 01594 stations

WCS Client

WCS Top

WCS Basic

Client Office: Office application licence enabling access to the program from any number of stations. WCS Gestionali

WCS Office Client

WCS Office

WCS Client

WCS Top

WCS Basic

Management: for interfacing with administration management software (contact Vimar to see if interfacing with the required management software is feasible). WCS Gestionali

WCS Office Client

WCS Office

WCS Client

WCS Top

WCS Basic

Applications The WCS software is used to carry out the following operations: • management of bookings (hotel version); • management of the user records; • management of structure personnel records; • management of access by users and personnel to the various rooms in the structure: creation of the cards for the access control system, management of the transponder readers of the part of the system that deals with access control, creation of lists with access log; • supervision of the automation system: climate control, activation of electric loads (lights on/off, dimmer lights, relays,…), access control management, alarm management, creation of scenarios, scheduling activation of scenarios, reaction of decisional logic elements, supervision of the E-way emergency lighting system. As regards managing security when using the Well-contact Suite software, the strategies implemented in the software are listed here: • access to the software allowed only for users previously configured in the software; • seven levels of software access “privileges” to be associated with the software users;

• encrypted data communication between the system file server and client systems; • encrypted “sensitive” data (e.g. software user password); • encrypted data communication between the system and the card programmer; • use of Mifare® Standard cards.

Besides the above-mentioned views, the Well-contact Suite software automatically creates a window with the “detail” view of the room, in which the graphic symbols of the room’s main functions are included; the type of functions automatically presented in the detail view of the room and the related characteristics can be customized according to the particular requirements of the user. In any case, the supervision windows created automatically by the Well-contact Suite software can be customized to collect the user’s requests. The Well-contact Suite software enables viewing the alarm events created by the Well-contact Plus system to send an alarm “reset” command to the system and create a log for these events. It is lastly possible to define different types of alarm together with the related display priorities.

Zone supervision screen

WELL-CONTACT PLUS Well-contact Suite software Well-contact Suite software Well-contact Suite Light software for managing and controlling the Well-contact Plus devices, complete with CD and hardware key

01590

As above, Well-contact Suite Basic

01591

As above, Well-contact Suite Top

01592

As above, Well-contact Suite Client

01593

As above, Well-contact Suite Office

01594

As above, Well-contact Suite Client Office WELL-CONTACT PLUS

01589

01589 01590 01591 01592 01593 01594

Supplementary Well-contact Suite software for administration management 01595

Supplementary Well-contact Suite software for interfacing with administration management software (for an up-to-date list of the supported management software, please contact the sales network)

01595

Spare USB key for Well-contact Suite 01597

Spare USB key for Well-contact Suite software

01597

To order in the event of breakage or malfunctioning of the USB hardware key contained in the package of the articles 01590, 01591, 01592, 01593, 01594. The broken original USB stick must be returned to Vimar.

WELL-CONTACT PLUS Software and interface 01993 - Hardware interface for programming and configuring By means of 01998 interface, supplied with driver for USB, connected to PC, it is possible to use the software for configuring KNX Well-contact Plus touch screens (21848, 20848.1, 19848.1, 14848.1, 21849, 20849, 19849, 16849, 14849). The configuration enables adding/modifying rooms, devices, page layout and updating the firmware, downloadable from www.vimar.com. The EasyDraw&EasyCap software suite enable programming and designing systems in CAD style, integrating both the range of By-me devices and that of KNX devices. The 01993 contains the 01947 interface for the By-me system management.

01998 - Interface USB connector for connecting to the PC

Technical specifications • the software is compatible with the following operating systems: Windows 7 (32 and 64 bit), Windows 8 (32 and 64 bit) • power supply directly from PC via USB port • USB cable with type-A connector for PC connection, 1.8 m long (supplied) • cable customized and polarized for connecting programming device, length of cable 1.5 m (supplied) • Operating temperature: 5°C - +40°C • dimensions 115x75x25 mm

Operation The ON LED comes on when the interface is connected to the computer via the USB cable. During the transmission/reception of the data, the LEDs h and i light up as follows:

Polarized cable for connection to device to program

• LED h on when the PC receives the data from the specific device; • LED i on when the PC transmits the data to the specific device.

Conformity to Standards EMC Directive, Standards EN 55022, EN 55024

Connecting the PC to the touch screens

8-module touch screen

3-module touch screen 01998 interface

WELL-CONTACT PLUS Software and interface Hardware interface for programming and configuring Hardware interface for programming By-me serial devices and Well-contact Plus touch screens and hardware interface for configuring By-me system via Bus connection with special RJ11 socket. EasyTool Professional software is required along with Well-contact Plus touch screen configuration software, downloadable from the Vimar website

WELL-CONTACT PLUS

01993

Software suite ∆ 01991

Software suite containing EasyTool Professional LT for the By-me system, touch screen configurer for the Well-contact Plus system complete with USB interface, EasyDraw and EasyCap software for designing and quoting electrical systems

∆ 01991

Touch screen configurer software screens

Screen example of 8 module touch configuration ∆ Available until stocks last

Screen example of 3 module touch configuration

WELL-CONTACT PLUS Installation examples The following examples give some types of hotel and tertiary sector systems; depending on the functions to be implemented, it is necessary to choose not only the devices but above all how these must be configured. In the case of a hotel room the guest, by putting the card into the transponder reader, enters the room; the device, after recognizing the card, activates the main light in the room and the bed-head courtesy light (example of a scenario) that then will also be able to be commanded by the single buttons. Subsequently the guest inserts the card into the pocket reader; lastly, when the guest leaves the room, he takes out the card and, after a set time, all the loads are switched off. In the room and the suite in the examples, different functions have been implemented according to the required level of comfort.

Room Required functions: check-in /check-out. Room status indicators on the external transponder reader: • Guest in room • Room occupied or “do not disturb” • Room to make up • Card recognition indicator 5 input indicators: wc/bathroom call, room service call, window contact, “do not disturb”, room main light control. 5 output relays: electrical lock opening, courtesy light, load disconnection, room main light, climate control ON/OFF solenoid valve command. 3 necessary components: external transponder card reader, internal transponder pocket reader, electronic thermostat. (Example with Idea series appliances)

16083.B Cord-operated single-pole button 16927.B

16923.B 16840.B + (2) 16841.B + 16841.2.B + 16843.B

16915.B

01820 Magnetic contact

100

WELL-CONTACT PLUS Installation examples Connection diagram

Room service call button

Room main light (230 V~)

* 16927.B

Do not disturb button

Bathroom ceiling pull-cord

* 16923.B

Room main light button

WELL-CONTACT WELL-CONTACT PLUS PLUS EXAMPLES

KNX Bus

Electric lock

Courtesy light (230 V~)

Load disconnection (230 V~)

12-24 V~

KNX Bus

16840.B + (2)16841.B + 16841.2.B + 16843.B

16915.B

SV Window contact 01820

230 V~

12-24 V~

230 V~

Reception

KNX Bus 01501.1

01540

20450

* IMPORTANT: The transponder readers and the

101

WELL-CONTACT PLUS Installation examples Suite Required functions: check-in /check-out. Room status indicators on the external transponder reader: • Guest in room • Room occupied or DO NOT DISTURB • Room to make up • Card recognition indicator 9 input indicators: WC/bathroom call, reset room service call, window contact, “do not disturb”, fridge-bar indicator, room service call, door open indicator, room main light control, 1 spare input.

9 output relays: electrical lock opening, courtesy light, bedside light, load disconnection, “guest in room” message, 3-speed fan coil control, room main light. 4 necessary components: external transponder card reader, internal transponder pocket reader, electronic thermostat, input/output device. Touch screen: control of lights, air-conditioning and scenarios in bedroom, bathroom and lounge.

(Example with Eikon series appliances)

20053

02952

21849

3 x 20008

20457

01522 20453

01820

102

WELL-CONTACT PLUS Installation examples Connection diagram

Room service call reset button

Room main light (230 V~)

* 20457

Do not disturb button

Bathroom ceiling pullcord

* 20453

Room main light button

02952

Electric lock

Courtesy light (230 V~)

Load disconnection (230 V~)

12-24 V~

WELL-CONTACT WELL-CONTACT PLUS PLUS EXAMPLES

KNX Bus

Bedside table light (230 V~)

230 V~ Window contact 01820

KNX Bus

Door open indicator 01820

21849

01522

Fridge-bar indicator

Fan-coil

Room service call button

L 230 V~ N

230 V~

Reception

KNX Bus 01501.1

01540

20450

* IMPORTANT: The transponder readers and the

103

WELL-CONTACT PLUS Installation examples Hotel ground floor The example in the figure illustrates entry and automation device management via the Well-contact Plus system with the KNX standard. By means of the transponder reader, entry to the rooms will be allowed only for cleared users; the control of the lights and roller shutters is performed using the 4 independent push button controls appropriately combined with their respective buttons. In the conference room, the lights are adjusted with a 4 independent pushbutton control combined with two double buttons, while in the reception the lighting is automatically adjusted via the brightness sensor 01530 connected to the

20840 + (2) 20841.0 + (2) 20841.2

dimmer by DIN rail 01528. The thermostat directly controls the solenoid valve for the heating/air-conditioning system besides turning it off if there is an open window (magnetic contact connected to the thermostat input). Finally, all the accesses made (guest, time, duration, etc.) and any alarms or faults will be monitored by the PC in the reception via the Well-contact Office Suite software. (Example with Eikon series appliances)

20840 + 20842.3

20840 + (2) 20841.2 + (2) 20841.0

01530

BAR

OFFICES STORE

20457

20848.1 + 20788 01501.1; 01504; 01523; 01524; 01526; 01528

TECH. ROOM

CONFERENCE ROOM RECEPTION

01540

104

20450

02952

20840 + (2) 20842.4

20840 + (2) 20842.3

WELL-CONTACT PLUS Installation examples Connection diagram

01523

20840 + (2) 20841.0 + (2) 20841.2

01524

M Light 1 Light 2 Light 1 Light 2 Offices Offices Bar Bar

Conference room roller shutter

20840 + 20841.3

WELL-CONTACT WELL-CONTACT PLUS PLUS EXAMPLES

KNX Bus

20840 + (2) 20841.0 + (2) 20841.2

20840 + 20841.4

M Reception roller shutter

L 230 V~ N

L3 L2

L 230 V~ N

Reception room light

Conference room light

BALLAST

0-10 V

21848 + 20788 V+

01530

01526

01528

V-

KNX Bus

* 20457

02952 01504

01501.1 V+

V30 V

* 20457

01820 SV

230 V~ Window contact

Light n* Electric lock

12 - 24 V~

230 V~

Reception

KNX Bus 01500

* IMPORTANT: The transponder readers and the ver-

tical pocket ones should be powered separately from all other loads (electric locks, lamps, contactors, etc.) using a transformer dedicated to them art. 16887 whose outputs should be used solely for these two devices.

01540

20450

* Offices, Conference room, Store, Technical room

105

WELL-CONTACT PLUS Installation examples Hotel common areas Managing the common areas in hotel structures is extremely important both because it allows complete supervision along with flexible convenient use of all the services provided by the structure and because from a commercial point of view it has a considerable impact on the guest. Checking entries, allowing entry only for authorized vehicles or, in places not normally manned, activating lights and generic controls and receiving any type of signalling increases the value perceived by the guest and at the same time offers advantages for the management personnel from an operational point of view. Using the new devices integrated in the Well-contact Plus system with the KNX standard, it is possible to manage all the environments, fully optimizing the work of the personnel and contributing significantly to the safety and control of the whole building. In particular, it will be possible to differentiate different solutions

for the common areas in order to manage the services offered to guests in a differentiated manner. By using the dedicated transponder reader it will be possible to control access to particular services such as for instance the swimming pool, sauna, spa and car parks, with the possibility of accounting them thanks to the interfacing between the Well-contact Suite management/supervision software and the management/ administration software. The lights and roller shutters are managed with the 4-button controls or the touch screen. The methods of managing the temperature for the Halls or for the common areas will be set at the time of programming; using the thermostat connected directly to the Bus will enable measuring the temperature in a certain area and, with the output on the thermostat, you can control the solenoid valve or the fan convectors for the heating and air-conditioning. (Example with Eikon white series appliances)

20840 + 20842.4.B 20840 + 20842.3.B

20457.B

SAUNA

02952.B

20850.B

20480 + 20482.4.B

TURKISH BATH SOLARIUM

GYM

01522; 01501.1; 01523; 01526; 01540

20840 + 20842.3.B

106

WELL-CONTACT PLUS Installation examples Connection diagram

20850.B

20840 + 20842.3.B

20850.B

20840 + 20842.3.B

WELL-CONTACT WELL-CONTACT PLUS PLUS EXAMPLES

KNX Bus

20840 + 20842.4.B

KNX Bus

* 20457.B

02952.B

01526

01524

230 V~

Light n*

Massage light

Electric lock

01522 M

Swimming Gym roller Pool roller shutter shutter

Turkish bath light

12 - 24 V~

Toilet light

Garage light

L1 230 V~ N

230 V~

Reception

KNX Bus 01501.1

01540

* Swimming pool, Sauna, Solarium, Turkish bath, Gym, Garage, Massage parlour, Changing room

* IMPORTANT: The transponder readers and the

20450.B

107

WELL-CONTACT PLUS Installation examples Offices The example in the figure illustrates the use of the Wellcontact Plus devices with the KNX standard in the typically tertiary sector in which there is the need to manage diversified accesses to the various offices/rooms while monitoring it all from the PC in the reception; the control of the lights and roller shutters is performed using the 4-button controls and the touch screens. By means of the transponder reader, entry to the offices and technical room will be allowed only for cleared users; the personnel manager will have access to all the areas 24 hours a day every day of the week while employees can only enter their own office and only on business days. The 3-module recess-mounting touch screens enable managing the lights, roller shutters and any scenarios for the office in which they are installed; the colour touch screen installed in

the meeting room enables controlling the lights, roller shutters, temperature and scenarios of the entire system. The lights and roller shutters in the reception and in the technical room are instead managed by the 4 independent pushbutton controls combined with the respective buttons identifying the controlled service; the infrared sensors installed in the bathroom switch the lighting on for a set time only when they detect the presence of one or more people in order to optimize energy consumption Finally, all the accesses made (employee, time, etc.) and any alarms or faults will be monitored and saved by the PC in the reception via the Well-contact Office Suite software. (Example with Plana series appliances)

(3) 14457

(4) 14850

14840 + 14841.0 + 14841.1 + (2) 14841.3

14848

14849 14849

14840 + 14842.0 + 14842.1

02952.B

01501.1; 01523; (3) 01524

01540

14450 14480 + 14841.0 + 14841.1 + (2) 14841.3

108

WELL-CONTACT PLUS Installation examples Connection diagram

14840 + 14841.0 + 14841.1 + (2) 14841.3

14840 + 14842.0 + 14842.1

14850

14849

WELL-CONTACT WELL-CONTACT PLUS PLUS EXAMPLES

KNX Bus

14849

14848.1 V+

V30 V

KNX Bus

* 14457

02952.B

01524

230 V~

Light n* Electric lock

01524 M

Recep- Roller tion roller shutter shutter Office 1

M Shutter 1 Meeting room

01524 M

Roller shutter Meeting room

01523 M

Roller shutter Roller shutter Light Light 2 Tech. room Office 2 1 Bathroom Bathroom Reception room light

12 - 24 V~

L 230 V~ N

230 V~

Reception

KNX Bus 01501.1

01540

* Corridor, Office 1, Meeting room, Technical room, Office 2

* IMPORTANT: The transponder readers and the

20450.B

109

WELL-CONTACT PLUS Installation examples Automation systems, video door entry and web server The diagram shows a system in which the automation and video door entry systems as well as being integrated, can also be controlled either locally or from a distance via web server. The 10" IP multimedia video touch screen monitors and controls all the automation and video door entry functions, such as viewing and voice communication with the caller, electric lock opening, switching on stair lighting and other auxiliary functions, intercom calls, ringtone customization, missed call

management and the video door entry phone answering service. It also allows viewing of IP and analogue cameras on 2 wires, enabling Elvox DVR control (live viewing, recording, PTZ movement) and, if enabled for web browsing, it supports multimedia functions (web radio, weather forecasts, news, RSS feeds) . (Example with Eikon Evo series appliances)

21553.1 20840 20840 02952, 20840 01545, 6922, 69MX, 69AM, 6582, 01501.1, 01524, 01830, 01523

•

Router

20565, 20570, 20840

21848, 20840

1222+13F5

20557, 20008.0+20031

20840

110

WELL-CONTACT PLUS Installation examples

2 2

Electric lock

20565

20570

COAX 2

1222+13F5

Router

UTP/FTP

Bus 1/0

LAN

2 69MX

6922

69AM

01501.1

6582

01524

M 2

01523

01830

LAN

HVAC Light 1 Light 2

20577

21553.1

02952

Bus 1/0

Bus 2 +-

01524

20840

01545

N 230 V~ L AUX

21848

111

WELL-CONTACT PLUS WELL-CONTACT PLUS EXAMPLES

Connection diagram

The system for secure communications and integrated management. Whether it is a small or large hospital, private clinic or nursing home the Call-way system is the ideal solution to manage emergencies swiftly and efficiently. Developed to be in compliance with VDE0834-1-2, the call system integrates seamlessly into any structure. The Call-way range also now features Plana series devices, controls, socket outlets and cover plates: the whole range has been subjected to a silver ion (Antibacterial) treatment to reduce the growth of bacteria and ensure the greatest hygiene.

DISPLAY MODULE. Installed in each room, it manages patient calls, displays the number of the ward and of the room.

112

ANTIBACTERIAL DEVICES. Antibacterial cover plates and devices treated with silver ions to reduce the replication of germs and bacteria. This technology is effective on more than 50 different species of bacteria, able to reduce proliferation by more than 90% over a period of 24 hours.

CORRIDOR DISPLAY. Installed in the various wards it displays system events such as calls, attendance, faults, alarms and messages for the ward (including advertisements).

ANTI-STRANGULATION MINI KEYPAD. Installed in each room, it allows patient calls and 2 light controls. In antibacterial treatment, it also offers a quick-release anti-strangulation feature. 113

CALL-WAY

Catalogue section

114

CALL-WAY

from page 116

GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS

from page 120

SYSTEM DEVICES

from page 132

FIRST GENERATION CALL-WAY APPLIANCES

from page 154

ANTIBACTERIAL PLANA DEVICES

from page 156

INSTALLATION EXAMPLES

from page 176

CALL-WAY

SELECTION GUIDE

115

CALL-WAY Selection guide Description

Code

Communication modules

Communication terminal and call display with display voice unit, 24 Vdc power supply (SELV), antibacterial treatment, equipped with flat cable for connecting the two units, complete with double base for semi-flushed installation on hollow walls, on boxes with 60 mm centre distance or on 3-module boxes

Display module for viewing calls, 4 buttons for scrolling, call, priority call and cancelling, 24 Vdc power supply (SELV), antibacterial treatment, complete with single base for semi-flushed installation on hollow walls, on boxes with 60 mm distance between centre or 3-module boxes

Voice unit module with 4 buttons for activating and controlling music and activating voice communication, antibacterial treatment, equipped with flat cable for connection to the display unit, complete with single base for surface installation

02080.AB white

02081.AB white

02082.AB white

Accessories

Removable spare terminal with 6+2 screw pins for display module

02085

Display and accessories

Corridor display to view the events of the Call-way system 02097

Wall fixing bracket for corridor display 02098

Ethernet/RS485 interface installation on DIN rail (60715 TH35), occupies 9 modules size 17,5 mm 02079

Mini keypad

Mini keypad with 2 light controls, antibacterial treatment, anti-strangulation function

02089.AB

116

CALL-WAY Selection guide Description

Code

Flush mounting appliances Call button with red reassurance light, antibacterial treatment - 2 modules

14501.AB white

Cord-operated call button with red reassurance light, antibacterial treatment - 2 modules 14503.AB white

Cancel button with acoustic signal for receiving other calls and green indicator light, antibacterial treatment - 2 modules

14504.AB white

Landing lamp

Landing LED lamp four colours (green, white, red, amber), for surface mounting 02084

Line coupler with Ethernet and voice control, 24 Vdc power supply, installation on DIN rail (60715 TH35), occupies 9 modules of 17,5 mm

Telephone coupler 24 Vdc power supply, installation on DIN rail (60715 TH35), occupies 9 modules size 17.5 mm

ESPA 4.4.4 interface for connection without PC between Call-way and a DECT/pager system or equipped with ESPA 4.4.4 interface, installation on DIN rail (60715 TH35), occupies 9 modules size 17,5 mm

CALL-WAY

DIN rail appliances (60715 TH35)

02094

02078

02095

Programmable card 8 inputs 8 outputs for managing multiple rooms, installation on DIN rail (60715 TH35), occupies 8 modules size 17,5 mm 02096

Devices and accessories Power supply unit with 24 Vdc output (SELV) 6,5 A, power supply 115/230 V~ 50/60 Hz

Cable Cat. 5e, shielded, 4-pair, 24 AWG with LSZH sheath, grey - 305 m

02090

03061

117

CALL-WAY Selection guide Description

Code

Plana control devices with antibacterial treatment Blank module 14041.AB

1-way switch 1P and 2P, 16 AX 250 V~, lightable, replaceable button

Reversing switch 1P 16 AX 250 V~, lightable, replaceable button

2-way switch 1P 16 AX 250 V~, lightable, replaceable button

Push button 1P NO 10 A 250 V~, lightable, replaceable button

14001.AB

14015.AB

14013.AB

14005.AB

14008.AB

Interchangeable button 2 modules, loop lightable 14022.AB

Cord-operated push button 1P NO 10 A 250 V~, with 1,5 m cord and knob 14052.AB

Plana dimmer with antibacterial treatment Universal dimmer 230 V~ 50 Hz, with built-in rotary potentiometer, minimum brightness setting, visible in darkness

14136.AB

Plana socket outlets with antibacterial treatment Bpresa SICURY 2P+E 16 A, Italian standard type P17/11, 14203.AB

Universal SICURY 2P+E 16 A, for Europlugs 2P 2.5 A, 2P and 2P+E 10 A and 16 A Italian standard plugs, 2P+E 16 A German standard plugs - 2 modules

14210.AB

German standard SICURY 2P+E 16 A 250 V~ - 2 modules 14208.AB

French standard SICURY 2P+E 16 A 250 V~ - 2 modules 14212.AB

Plana socket outlets for dedicated power supply lines with antibacterial treatment Bpresa SICURY 2P+E 16 A, Italian standard type P17/11, red Universal SICURY 2P+E 16 A, for Europlugs 2P 2.5 A, 2P and 2P+E 10 A and 16 A Italian standard plugs, 2P+E 16 A German standard plugs - 2 modules

118

14203.AB.R red

14210.AB.A orange

14210.AB.R red

14210.AB.V green

CALL-WAY Selection guide Description

Code

Plana shaver supply unit with antibacterial treatment Shaver supply unit with 20 VA isolating transformer, supply voltage 230 V~ 50/60 Hz, 120 V~ output voltage for 2P 15 A 125 V~ American standard plugs with non-polarized flat blades, and 230 V~ output voltage for 2P 2,5 A Europlugs - 3 modules

14290.AB

Plana special socket outlet made of antibacterial treatment Socket outlet 2P 6 A 24 V (SELV), for plugs ø 3 mm with 12,4 mm distance between centre 14330.AB

Plana signal sockets with antibacterial treatment RJ11 socket 6 positions, 4 contacts (6/4), screw terminals 14320.AB

RJ45 socket with Netsafe connector Cat. 6, unshielded, T568A/B universal wiring, 8 contacts, insulation-piercing terminals without using tools RJ45 socket with Netsafe connector Cat. 6, shielded, T568A/B universal wiring, 8 contacts, insulation-piercing terminals without using tools

14339.AB.13

14339.AB.14

RJ45 socket 8 positions, 8 contacts (8/8), screw terminals 14342.AB

14300.AB.01

CALL-WAY

Coaxial socket outlet TV-RD-SAT 5-2400 MHz direct (shunted), with male connector, connection attenuation 1 dB. Allows the passage of direct current and control signals (24 V 500 mA max)

Plana cover plates with antibacterial treatment

2-module 14642.AB.01

3-module 14653.AB.01

4-module 14654.AB.01

7-module 14657.AB.01

4-module (2+2) 71 mm distance between centre 14643.AB.01

6-module (2+2+2) 71 mm distance between centre 14644.AB.01

8-module (2+2+2+2) 71 mm distance between centre 14669.AB.01

119

CALL-WAY General characteristics Field of application The new Call-way system complies with the standard VDE08341-2 and, within the framework of existing receptive structures, it enables creating management and supervision systems for calls and communications by patients and/or medical and paramedical staff to the switchboard, other rooms or wards, and outside the hospital. In recent years, the emerging concept of the high-tech hospital and the proliferation of nursing homes and care facilities for the elderly and/or physically challenged has led the market to develop solutions that guarantee increasingly high standards of service and organisation to meet all types of requirement. The result is Call-way which, in addition to considerably improving organisation in hospitals, private clinics and care facilities, also increases the level of service and safety for patients and optimises the efficiency and effectiveness of the health care professionals working there. The devices in the Call-way system, developed on Bus technology, offer solutions that enable the highest level of efficiency, responding perfectly to all installation requirements and the constraints imposed by the different facilities such as hospitals, clinics, nursing homes and care facilities in general. The system is available in English too.

Technical specifications What distinguishes the Call-way system is its ease of installation and programming, along with the clarity and flexibility of its use; these devices enable two distinct operating modes: • VDE-0834 with PC/Display for Corridor The system is operated by the ADL-EF and is compliant with the VDE0834 -1-2 standard on signalling systems in healthcare facilities. The PC/DC is configured for managing: logs, statistics, ward consolidations and voice calls via the Phone coupler (AT). • VDE-0834 without PC The system is still managed by the ADL-EF and is compliant with VDE0834 -1-2. Interfacing is guaranteed with DECT/ pager systems and voice calls to the wards but accessory functions are not handled such as logs, statistics and ward consolidations. Methods that invalidate VDE0834-1-2 • Off-Line Method to ensure a minimum level of service in the event of failure of an ADL-EF in the network. In the event of failure the secondary backbone will continue to operate and the supervision and corridor display will signal the malfunctioning with dedicated signals. • On-line This is equivalent to the old way where there is a personal computer that centralizes all the information shown on

120

the display (modules and terminals) in order to supervise the entire system, save events (calls, room number, etc.), manage call priority and voice communication between rooms, between wards and to external devices (fixed or cordless phones, pagers, etc.), diagnostic call management (via clean contact from medical equipment to the display modules or communications terminals). The display modules, combined with devices called voice modules, will constitute the communication terminals; in addition to displaying the type and characteristics of the calls, the terminal will then not only enable hands-free two-way communication with another terminal but also transmission of a music channel connected to an external source and, if there is a telephone coupler, also interfacing with pagers, switchboards, etc., in order to broadcast announcements and/or talk using the regular phone. A call by a patient can be made with a special "mini keypad" or a ceiling pull; for this purpose the Call-way system range includes three buttons with an indicator light that match the Plana series and enable having a suitable user interface that is ergonomic, non-invasive on the wall and above all coordinated with all the other components of the traditional electrical system. The functions/services that the Call-way system is able to offer can be subdivided as follows:

Services for patients Each patient will be able to make a distress call with a simple manual operation on the mini keypad that is connected to the call button on the bed head. On activating the call, with either the mini keypad or the button, the caller bed red light will come on (brighter than when on stand-by) which will give the patient the perception and the reassurance of the call being made. If the room terminal has a voice module, the patient will be able to communicate with nurses and/or physicians via the room terminal (after the medical personnel have started the communication). The terminal can also be used to receive and adjust the volume of an external sound source (music channel or otherwise); in the case of a service call, an internal relay will automatically switch over the device which will give priority to this call. From the room's bathroom it will also be possible, as mentioned above, to make a distress call with the dedicated pull-cord; this button also has a red reassurance light that will come on (brighter than when on stand-by) simultaneously with the call for help.

CALL-WAY General characteristics Services for medical and paramedical staff Using the Call-way system will enable medical and nursing personnel to respond to calls promptly even from a distance (version with voice communication) improving and optimizing response times considerably. Via the display you can view all the current events (calls, guests in room, priority levels, places of origin of the calls, system failures) and cancel calls locally once the patient has received the care they requested. If there is a communication terminal, it will be possible to respond locally to a patient call from any room equipped with a terminal and cancel the call at a distance; if the staff providing care to the patient finds a situation of danger or severity they can make an emergency call to request immediate medical attention. The voice unit channel is always activated with system control when there is a call to the room (generated by the telephone coupler) or a voice unit conference request.

Dedicated services for the hospital management/ organization The Call-way system will enable optimizing human resources, significantly improving the efficiency of the service in the ward. Each display in the room will be able to instantly show the status of calls, the place of origin and the presence of medical and nursing staff; when the installed device is a communication terminal it will be possible to answer and deal with patient calls at a distance, broadcast room and ward announcements and interface with fixed telephone devices, pagers or cordless phones. With the aid of a PC, with Call-way installed, it will be possible to save the status of events (calls, presences, processing times of calls, etc.) directly to the file so that it can then be stored and subsequently used in case of need.

CALL-WAY

The manner in which the communication is handled (full-duplex/ half-duplex) is determined by the device that initiates the voice unit conference: - telephone coupler: always full-duplex - voice: depending on the chosen configuration

The half-duplex communication can take place in two ways: - Hands-free, where the “direction” of the communication is established by the tone of voice; the exchange is made when the voice unit module recognizes a higher sound level of one speaker than the other. - Push to talk, where the communication exchange between the parties is made by pressing the "voice direction command" button of the voice module (push-to-talk, release to listen)

Services for patients The patient makes a call with the mini keypad or cord-operated push button; the communication terminal is activated in the

nurses' room and in the room; the red light (from the mini keypad) or white light (from the ceiling pull) turns on in the corridor.

VIMAR

121

VIMAR

CALL-WAY General characteristics VIMAR

VIMAR

Services for medical and paramedical staff The nurse comes to the room, cancels the call and shows she needs to remain via the communication terminal; the call is VIMAR

deactivated in the nurses' room; the red or white light turns off in the corridor and lights up green.

VIMAR

Dedicated services for the hospital management/ organization The acceptance department and the medical staff within the

122

facility can monitor calls, operations and personnel in order to maximize resources.

CALL-WAY General characteristics System architecture

The Call-way system uses a Bus as a means of transmission, composed of cables with the following characteristics: • 2x2.5 mm2 for connecting the 24 Vdc power supply • 2x0.22 mm2 FTP Cat. 5e shielded for data transmission • 2x0.22 mm2 FTP Cat. 5e shielded for voice transmission • 2x0.22 mm2 FTP Cat. 5e shielded for transmitting announcements/music channel. As an alternative to the three FTP cables, a single SSTP cable can be used. Using the Bus to connect devices ensures not only a simplification of the installation, wiring and maintenance operations, but also a high level of immunity from interference. The main feature of the system architecture is its open loop structure; this allows each device connected to the line to communicate with all the other components in two distinct modes: • VDE-0834 with PC/Display for Corridor The system is operated by the ADL-EF and is compliant with the VDE0834 -1-2 standard on signalling systems in healthcare facilities. The PC/DC is configured for managing: logs, statistics, ward consolidations and voice calls via the Phone coupler (AT). • VDE-0834 without PC The system is still managed by the ADL-EF and is compliant with VDE0834 -1-2. Interfacing is guaranteed with DECT/ pager systems and voice calls to the wards but accessory functions are not handled such as logs, statistics and ward consolidations.

display modules, telephone coupler) and the number of power supply units needed will be determined according to the number of components; each power supply unit delivers an output current of 6.5 A. The system is able to manage up to 128 lines connected together by line couplers; all the connected devices communicate with each other over an Ethernet network, exchanging information over the network in accordance with the rules of the communication protocol. The range of devices comprising the Call-way system is greatly reduced thanks to the considerable flexibility and functionality they offer; just by using the room device (communication terminal or display module), you can control and manage all the inputs/outputs in the room; the default configuration is as follows: • 3 bed call buttons • 1 ceiling pull • 1 ceiling pull cancellation • 4 landing indicator lamps (call, nurse present, bathroom call and assistance call or diagnostics).

The basic element on which the system architecture stands is the line; this is also the starting point for expanding the system up to the maximum possible configuration in terms of devices and shared functions. Each line can be composed of at most 128 devices, each one with its own physical address (communication terminals,

The devices are connected serially since, should one of the components malfunction, the proper operation of the other devices is not affected and the services in the other rooms are not impaired.

Call-way system general outline Corridor display Corridor display Display Corridor Display di corridoio Display di corridoio di display corridoio

PC PC o or 02097 02097

Degenza Bed rest

Switch SwitchEthernet Ethernet

Degenza Bed rest

Secondary backbone Dorsale secondaria

02094 JPI

RUN PRI SEC

ISP PROG

DL1

DL2

DORSALE PRINC.

DL3

RUN PRI SEC

DORSALE PRINCIPALE D2 D2 – +

02092 ACCOPPIATORE DI LINEA 492.20920 0A 0507 VIMAR - Marostica - Italy

INDIRIZZO ON

DORSALE SECONDARIA M2 M1 F2 F1 D2 D1 – + DIP

ALIM. AUX – – + +

C A

ALIM. AUX

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

B B

C A

A C

C B

02090 Dorsale secondaria Secondary backbone

Secondary backbone Dorsale secondaria

02094 DL1

DL2

RUN PRI SEC

ISP PROG

DORSALE PRINCIPALE D2 D2 – +

DL1

DL2

DORSALE PRINC.

DL3

RUN PRI SEC

couple FTP FTP--Cat. Cat.5e5e(dati) (data) B 1 coppia

DORSALE PRINCIPALE D2 D2 – +

02092

ACCOPPIATORE DI LINEA

ACCOPPIATORE DI LINEA 492.20920 0A 0507 VIMAR - Marostica - Italy

INDIRIZZO ON

A 2 x 2,5 2,5 mm mm22 (alimentazione) (power)

02094 DORSALE PRINC.

DL3

RUN PRI SEC

JPI

RUN PRI SEC

ISP PROG

02092

DORSALE SECONDARIA M2 M1 F2 F1 D2 D1 – + DIP

492.20920 0A 0507 VIMAR - Marostica - Italy

ALIM. AUX – – + +

INDIRIZZO ON

ALIM. AUX

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

DORSALE SECONDARIA M2 M1 F2 F1 D2 D1 – + DIP

230 Vac Legenda: Legend

ALIM. AUX – – + + ALIM. AUX

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

FTP--Cat. Cat.5e 5e(fonia/musica) (voice/music) coppie FTP C 2 couples

02090

02090 230 Vac

230 Vac

Locale caposala Staff supervisor room

Soggiorno Living room

Bagno assistito Supervised bath

I cavi C possono B and BC ecables can beessere joined to SSTP cable twisted, shielded, cat. 6) 4 Coppie intrecciate schermate singolarmente) riuniti (4-pair in un unico cavo SSTP (Cat.6

123

CALL-WAY

The communication terminal and the display module also allow the following configurations: • 3 bed calls, 1 bathroom call and 1 bathroom call cancellation • 2 bed calls, 2 diagnostics calls and 1 bathroom call • 2 bed calls, 2 diagnostics calls and 1 bathroom call cancellation • 4 bed calls and 1 bathroom call • 5 bed calls

CALL-WAY General characteristics Call-way system wiring diagram

LEGEND: 02080.AB - Communication terminal 02089.AB - Mini keypad 02090 - Power supply unit 02094 - Line coupler 14342.AB - RJ45 socket 14501.AB - Call button 14503.AB - Pull-cord call button 14504.AB - Cancellation button

2 4 2 cp FTP

1 cp FTP

2x2.5 mm2

02080.AB

02089.AB

14342.AB

02089.AB

14342.AB

5 3

14501.AB

02084 14503.AB

4 2 14504.AB 4 2 cp FTP

1 cp FTP

2x2.5 mm2

02089.AB

14342.AB

02080.AB

14501.AB

5 3

14501.AB

02084

2 4 4 14504.AB

2 cp FTP

1 cp FTP

2x2.5 mm2 02094

02090

230 V~

124

14503.AB

CALL-WAY General characteristics Secondary backbone connections 02090 L

–V –V +V +V

230 V~

L N

Dorsale Main principale backbone

Shield Schermatura

+ +

Shield Schermatura

–

RJ45

Shield Schermatura

2 x 2,5 mm2

–

+ D1 D2

– –

Display di corridoio Corridor display

D1 D2 F1 F2 M1 M2

02080.AB or o 02081.AB

2cpFTP CAT5

Shield Schermatura

1cpFTP CAT5 2cpFTP CAT5

02080.AB or o 02081.AB

Shield Schermatura + –

02094

1cpFTP CAT5

D1 D2 F1 F2 M1 M2

Use a twisted when switch default Utilizzare un cavocable crossato in assenza di switch + – D1 D2 F1 F2 M1 M2

02080.AB o 02081.AB XB

02078

PABX

B XL A B XV A

Telefono locale Local phone (VOX) (VOX) GND XM IN XH GND IN

Ingresso annunci PC voice vocali da PC anoucemens

input

Canale annunci / Anoucemens channel / diffusione musicale music diffusion

Main backbone connections CALL-WAY

02094 ADL - EF COUPLER

Call-Way

–

Switch ethernet Switch ethernet

1 02090 UTP 4 couples coppie

02080.AB

2 Power cables 2x2,5 mmmm2 Cavi di alimentazione 2x2,5

+ –

LN 230 Vac

1 D1 D2 F1 F2 M1 M2

02081.AB

+ –

–

D1 D2 F1 F2 M1 M2

Display didisplay corridoio Corridor

02094 - 1

02090

UTP 4 couples coppie

2 + –

1 D1 D2 F1 F2 M1 M2

LN 230 Vac Schermatura Shield

02081.AB

+ –

02080.AB

–

D1 D2 F1 F2 M1 M2

02094 - 2

02090

UTP 4 couples coppie

2 +

+ –

–

– LN 230 Vac

D1 D2 F1 F2 M1 M2

Schermatura Shield

D1 D2 F1 F2 M1 M2

02080.AB o 02081.AB

02094 - 3 SSTP 44 couples coppie SSTP

125

CALL-WAY General characteristics Display wiring diagram, with no voice unit

Reach the module with cables size 1 - 1.5 mm2

Earthing must not be interrupted by the cable that reaches the one that goes to the next module

Earth must be connected to GND (-) directly on the power supply unit 24 V power supply backbone: the backbone must have a cable cross section of at least 2.5 mm2

At the end of the line, earth must be left open

Wiring diagram for display, with cables for voice and music

Reach the module with cables size 1 1.5 mm2 Earthing must not be interrupted by the cable that reaches the one that goes to the next module

Earth must be connected to GND (-) directly on the power supply unit

24 V power supply backbone: the backbone must have a cable cross section of at least 2.5 mm2

At the end of the line, earth must be left open

Example of IN/OUT connection Room 1

Example of IN/OUT wiring Room 2

02081.AB

Room 1

02081.AB

Room 2

02081.AB

126

The data cable earths must NOT be in common with those of the voice cable, they must be suitably insulated in order to avoid interference from other noninsulated cables

02081.AB

The DATA and VOICE cable shields must never be connected together along the path of the cable, but only at the start of the system. The junction point at the start must be connected to the nearest negative (V- of the power supply unit 02090).

CALL-WAY General characteristics Vertical installation of the display and voice units TUBO Ø 25 mm

180

02081.AB Display unit

V71303 Flush mounting box 6

130

17,5

Single base for installation on light walls, on boxes with 60 mm distance between centres or on 3-module boxes

Horizontal installation of the display and voice units

CALL-WAY

02082.AB Voice unit

TUBO Ø 25 mm

V71303 Flush mounting box

02081.AB Display unit

130

17,5

Single base for installation on light walls, on boxes with 60 mm distance between centres or on 3-module boxes

02082.AB Voice unit

127

CALL-WAY General characteristics Installation components When creating an installation with the Call-way system, the following components are used: • Power supply unit • Line coupler • Communication terminal • Display module • Voice unit module • Telephone coupler • Call buttons, mini keypad and landing lamps

Set the system It is important, in the phase of system setting, to have a clear idea of which functions are to be implemented according to the type of assistance required; this will obviously depend on the type of the facility where the system is to be installed since, for example, a hospital will have different needs to those of a centre for the physically challenged. Call-way system devices can be configured, depending on the different needs, in different ways; the types of configuration are the following: • self-learning, via extremely simple operations carried out manually on the buttons of the display module, in the case of VDE-0834 mode without PC • using PC software in the case of VDE-0834 mode with PC/ Corridor Display. As regards the actual preparation of the system and therefore laying out the cables and positioning the devices, it will be enough to take into account the following precautions: • Add up the power inputs of the single devices (that must be no more than 128 per line) such as display modules, communication terminals, line coupler and telephone coupler so as to determine the number of power supplies to install (if the current absorption of the devices in a line is greater than 6.5 A it is necessary to have a second power supply and so on). When calculating the current absorption it is necessary to take into account the consumption of the button LEDs (bed call, ceiling pull), the mini keypad LEDs and the lamps connected to the display modules and to the communication terminals; each LED has a consumption of 30 mA while for the lamps each module will be able to deliver up to 250 mA. In the case of wards with a large number of rooms (from 20 to 30 rooms), the total consumption of the lamps and LEDs, which must be added to that of the system devices, is given by the sum of the current absorption of the lamps and LEDs multiplied by 0.2 (coefficient taking into account the fact that it is never possible for all the lamps and LEDs in a system to switch on simultaneously).

Example In a ward of 20 rooms, each room is equipped with a communication terminal which is connected to a bed call button and two RJ45 sockets with their mini keypads, a ceiling pull, a call reset button and a landing indicator lamp. The current absorption of the room devices will be equal to: - Communication terminal current absorption 70 mA; - Landing lamp output current absorption max 250 mA; - Push buttons LED current absorption 1 x 30 mA (30 mA). - Mini keypads LED current absorption 2x 30 mA (60 mA)

128

The total consumption of the devices in the ward (20 rooms), equal to 2760 mA (2.76 A), is given by: - (250 mA + 30 mA + 60 mA) x 20 x 0.2 + 20 x 70 mA. The power supply 02090, which delivers an output current of 6.5 A, is thus easily sufficient to provide power to the entire ward. • Evaluate accurately, according to the size of the healthcare facility, whether a line can be considered as a floor or whether a line can cover a number of floors or, vice versa, whether the property is so large that covering a floor requires a number of lines (therefore, at the design stage, take account of the characteristics of a line in terms of number of devices and consumption). • The number of lines forming the system will determine the number of couplers that must be installed (the lines are connected together by line couplers that allow communication between devices belonging to different lines). • Determine the desired requirements for the voice/announcements functions in order to establish the number and location of the phone couplers intended for managing voice communications, interfacing with PABX switchboards and transmitting the announcements/music channel. If, for example, a single voice channel is believed sufficient for the entire system, it will be enough to have the telephone coupler on one line; conversely, if you want to implement simultaneous and independent communication between the terminals of a ward and all the others you will need a telephone coupler for each ward. • The Call-way software lets you easily manage operating profiles/scenarios by time slots or specific days (holidays, etc.) so as to enable centralizing the control desks and all the signalling and voice functions associated with them; this is in order to optimize the presence of personnel without reducing the quality of the service and the level of safety. • Cables need to be laid depending on the type chosen for system operation (signalling only with display module or signalling and voice with communication terminal). Call-way system devices, apart from those with DIN pins, can be installed in a V71303 flush mounting 3 module box or in a round 60 mm diameter box. Although display module 02081. AB and communication terminal 02080.AB are wall mounted devices, they need a flush mounting 3 module box or ø 60 mm round box to house the terminals.

Summary of features and functions The Call-way system is designed to meet the diverse application requirements of public and private health institutions for providing care; as mentioned earlier, it is easy to see how the demands of a nursing home can, for example, be different from those of a hospital or private clinic. Being able to meet those demands and trying to ensure operational independence, typical of distributed intelligence systems, are the conditions with which the Call-way system has been implemented. Each ward can be equipped with one or more operating stations (control desks) that directly manage their peripheral units; within the operating station or ward, solutions can be implemented with only the display or with the communication terminal. Whether to use a personal computer or not uniquely defines the type of operation;

CALL-WAY General characteristics Peripheral wiring diagram 4

02089.AB

14342.AB

02081.AB

02089.AB

14342.AB

14501.AB

5 02080.AB 02084

14503.AB

4 14504.AB

Methods that invalidate VDE0834-1-2 • Off-Line Method to ensure a minimum level of service in the event of failure of an ADL-EF in the network. In the event of failure the secondary backbone will continue to operate and the supervision and corridor display will signal the malfunctioning with dedicated signals. • On-line This is equivalent to the old way where there is a personal computer that centralizes all the information shown on the display (modules and terminals) in order to supervise the entire system, save events (calls, room number, etc.), manage call priority and voice communication between rooms, between wards and to external devices (fixed or cordless phones, pagers, etc.), diagnostic call management (via clean contact from medical equipment to the display modules or communications terminals). In the case of on-line operation it becomes necessary to use a line coupler upstream of the backbone (main line from which are derived all the other lines). Note that, in any case, passing from one system mode to the other does not require replacing any existing components, but only integrating them with additional devices. Using Bus technology is particularly advantageous especially in economic terms; due to the ease of installation and a significant reduction in the number of conductors, it is possible to dramatically reduce wiring and system configuration times

Equally important is the time for system maintenance; in the event of malfunctioning, internal self-diagnosis recognizes the nature of the fault, identifying the affected device that can be replaced very practically and fast while avoiding unwanted system shutdowns and prolonged disruptions in the room.

Interoperability with external systems The Call-way system can easily communicate with paging systems (via the ESPA 4.4.4 protocol) and telephone equipment or PABX switchboards. This type of application enables call transmission even in places where normally there are no specific terminals (for communication or display modules) and allows the medical and paramedical staff to be reached by messages or calls from patient rooms. If fixed telephone equipment or DECT portable phones are available, healthcare professionals will be able to make direct communication with the room from where the call is made and talk with those present (patients or other health care personnel already in the room) or send messages of a general nature (announcements or warnings) to all the rooms where there are communication terminals. The above applications depend on the type of device installed in the room: • with the display module 02081.AB it will be possible to interface the system with pagers; • with the communication terminal 02080.AB or by adding the voice unit module 02082.AB to the display module 02081.AB, the system can be interfaced with pagers, fixed and cordless phones; in addition, when interfacing with phones, calls may be transmitted by means of special audio messages (wave files) from the supervisory PC.

129

CALL-WAY

• VDE-0834 with PC/Display for Corridor The system is operated by the ADL-EF and is compliant with the VDE0834 -1-2 standard on signalling systems in healthcare facilities. The PC/DC is configured for managing: logs, statistics, ward consolidations and voice calls via the phone coupler (AT). • VDE-0834 without PC The system is still managed by the ADL-EF and is compliant with VDE0834 -1-2. Interfacing is guaranteed with DECT/ pager systems and voice calls to the wards but accessory functions are not handled such as logs, statistics and ward consolidations.

CALL-WAY General characteristics System diagram - communication terminal 02080.AB LEGEND: 02080.AB - Communication terminal 02090 - Power supply unit 02094 - Line coupler 02078 - Phone coupler

02094

Note: In this configuration, staff can make: • calls to patients by phone (VOX/PABX/DECT) • audio messages • paging service

02090

230 V~

02094

02078

02090

230 V~ 02080.AB

02080.AB

Local phone VOX

PABX

Phone extensions

RS232 ESPA 4.4.4

Control room

130

RS232 ESPA 4.4.4

Paging system

DECT system

Configuration and supervision

Each of these operations will be displayed and confirmed or modified with the front buttons of the display module or communication terminal.

adding but also self-acknowledging modules so as to simplify system configuration. In addition, you can view all calls in progress, the presence of health personnel, the records of all events, the assignment of calls to staff according to the priorities assigned, interfacing with external devices (telephones, pagers, etc.), and the creation of ward association profiles (common recipients of a call). The software is able to manage the connection between multiple PCs via LAN; each PC can be connected to one or more line couplers 02094 to each of which one or more room devices can be connected according to the requirements and the type of system. The user interface for all the available menus is graphical and in each window there are fields for entering data; thanks to its network of service providers, Vimar offers a system configuration and start-up service.

Configuration via PC takes place using dedicated software, downloadable free of charge from the VIMAR website, and after manual configuration in the ward and room of the display modules or communication terminals. The software allows not only

The software's user manual, in pdf format, is freely available on www.vimar.com; the table below lists the main configuration elements of the Call-way system according to the required types of management and supervision.

The system configuration procedures are very simple and intuitive and they occur in two different ways depending on whether you want to use a PC or not. Manual configuration is done with the buttons on the front of the display module or the communication terminal with which you are going to set: - the ward number; - the room number; - the function of the device (ie, if the display module functions as a room unit or control desk). - backward compatibility (should it be necessary to place the device in an existing room with legacy devices).

Function

Call parameter configuration

This is used to set the ways in which calls are made (time for passing from one priority to another, call resetting, repeating call audible warning according to a settable time). This menu lets you send not only calls but also the presence of health personnel to the device display, set the audible warning for the start of voice communication, set the destination of a call to the phone coupler and set the serial port if needed.

Log

This lets you distinguish between events that need to be stored in memory from those that need to be excluded.

Ward merging profiles

This lets you direct all the calls of one or more wards to another ward where staff are able to assist; this type of function is useful in time slots when staff are fewer (at night) or on particular days of the year (holidays, etc.).

ESPA settings (for communication with external devices)

The ESPA protocol is one of the most popular standards and allows the Callway system to interface with other systems and carry out a mutual exchange of information (typical use in paging systems).

Technical Setup

Module/layout configuration

This lets you add, delete or configure not only each device on the Bus, but also every room, bed or bathroom in the building. There are two different viewing methods: layout (viewing wards, rooms, beds and bathrooms) or modules (viewing devices).

Device configuration

Setting device parameters

Sets all those general parameters that regulate the operating mode of each of the devices in the system.

Technical Setup

Sets the information that appears on the display and the call parameters.

Telephone coupler technical setup

Sets the specific operating parameters of the phone coupler

Call configuration (priority, etc.)

Lets you manage call "traffic" according to priority timing and levels of urgency that can be set according to the different needs of the facility.

Call destination configuration

The management software lets you take targeted action on the running of the program and inhibit or allow the use of certain features depending on the user that is using it.

Users Groups/Security

The management software lets you take targeted action on the running of the program and inhibit or allow the use of certain features depending on the user that is using it.

Reports

Displays a report (in table form) relating to the events recorded by the system.

Configuration file

Used to access a configuration file containing some system settings that can be useful to access directly rather than through the database.

Bus-on-lan

Used to set the parameters for communication between PC and ADL-EF and choose the look and feel of the program and the operating mode.

System configuration

Configuration

131

CALL-WAY

CALL-WAY General characteristics

CALL-WAY System devices Communication terminal The device, installed inside the single room, is composed of the display module and the voice unit module. The display module enables sending and managing calls made by patients and/or by medical and paramedical personnel and displaying the data relating to the calls (room number, bed number, call level, events memory, etc.). The device, after a simple configuration, can be used without distinction as a room module or for control; it is equipped with 4 front buttons for assistance and emergency calls, presence and scrolling events list, it can be connected to 3 bed call buttons (made with push buttons 14501.AB or RJ45 sockets 14342.AB for the mini keypads 02089.AB), 1 bathroom call button (14503. AB) and 1 bathroom call cancelling button (14504.AB). The display module moreover enables connecting the landing light 02084 to signal nurse present, bathroom call and room call. On stand-by (that is to say when no operations are carried out on the device), the display shows the current time both in online mode and VDE-0834 (if the network contains at least one PC). The voice unit module enables hands-free communication between patient and nurse and between nurses; via the voice unit module it is moreover possible to make room, ward and general announcements and broadcast a music channel with the possibility of adjusting the listening volume. The device is equipped with 4 front buttons to activate voice communication, switch on, off and adjust the volume (decrease and increase) of the music channel. The device is antibacterial and ensures full hygiene thanks to the action of the silver ions (AG+), preventing the formation and spread of germs, bacteria, viruses and fungi. To maintain the hygiene and effectiveness of its antibacterial action, clean the product regularly.

Technical data supply voltage current absorption Lamp output current absorption LED output current absorption Mini keypad current absorption Speaker output power Speakers operating temperature

24 Vdc SELV ± 20% 70 mA 250 mA max 250 mA max 3 x 30 mA (30 mA each) 0.15 W/16 Ω 2 x 8 Ω -250 mW in series 5°C - + 40°C (indoor)

Conformity to Standards EMC directive Standards EN 60950-1, EN 61000-6-1, EN 61000-6-3

Front view 02080.AB

Display Ore // Hour Numero Ward dinumber reparto.

Minuti / / Minutes Numero Room dinumber camera.

Bed Numero number di letto.

Indicazione del tipo di chiamata: Call type:

Presence = Presenza Assistance = Assistenza Emergency = Emergenza = Chiamata Bathroom bagno call = Chiamata diagnostica Diagnostics call (chiamata call) tecnica) (technical Stato audio (canale Audio state fonico o musicale (activated phonic or music channel attivato con with set volume indicazione del livello diindication) volume).

132

Presenza Remote remota. control

Nurse in the room Presenza in camera.

Contatore eventi (chiamate, ecc.) Call counter Posizione, lista, Position of nella the call dell’evento in the list ofcorrente the counter (chiamate, guasti, ecc.)

• Push-button A: Scrolling through events list (in the configuration phase: confirms operation). • Push-button B: Emergency call • Push-button C: Normal or care call (in the configuration phase: increase/decrease and yes/no). • Push-button D: Nurse present (in the configuration phase: increase/ decrease and yes/no). • Push-button E: Switching music

channel on/off and controlling voice direction (press to speak). • Push-button F: Decrease volume (music channel only). • Push-button G: Increase volume (music channel only). • Push-button H: Voice communication.

CALL-WAY System devices Connections 02080.AB

INPUTS/OUTPUTS INGRESSI / USCITE.

BED3C

BED2L

BED2C

BED1L

BED1C

WCRL

WCR

WCC

BED3L

BUZ

LAMP G W R G2

- OUT +

++ OUT SELV): connection for comuni OUT (24 (24 Vdc V d.c. SELV): collegamento common power supply di alimentazione unità dielements chiamata of bedroom/bathroom call units letto/bagno (14501.AB, 14503.AB), reset (14501.AB, 14503.AB), bathroom bagno (14504.AB) e lampade fuori porta reset (14504.AB) and outdoor lamp (02084) (02084) –– ::collegamento negative connection forunità passive unit qualora negativo passive when required richiesto

WCCL

POWER SUPPLY ALIMENTAZIONE.

BUS BUS. +, ::Alimentazione d.c. SELV. +, –– Power supply 24 24 V Vdc SELV Data connection D1, D2 ::Collegamento dati. F1, F2 F2 ::Collegamento Voice connection F1, fonia. M1, M2 Music speakerdiffusione connection M1, M2 ::Collegamento musicale.

– +

BUZ : external : pilotaggio buzzer esterno. BUZ buzzer piloting G : lampada fuoriporta (presenza infermiera) G : outdoor lamp (nurse presence) W : lampada fuoriporta W : outdoor lamp (bed call)(chiamata bagno) R : lampada fuoriporta (chiamata camera/letto) R : outdoor lamp (room/bed call) G2 : lampada fuoriporta (chiamata emergenza/diagnostica) G2 : outdoor lamp (emergency/diagnostics call) BED3L : bed : led3direassurance rassicurazione BED3L LEDletto 3 BED3C : bed : chiamata letto 3 (art. 14501.AB o 14342.AB) BED3C 3 call (art. 14501.AB o 14342.AB) BED2L : bed : led2direassurance rassicurazione BED2L LEDletto 2 BED2C : bed : chiamata letto 2 (art. 14501.AB o 14342.AB) BED2C 2 call (art. 14501.AB o 14342.AB) BED1L : bed : led1direassurance rassicurazione BED1L LEDletto 1 BED1C : bed : chiamata letto 1 (art. 14501.AB o 14342.AB) BED1C 1 call (art. 14501.AB o 14342.AB) WCCL : bathroom : led di rassicurazione bagno WCCL reassurance LED WCC : bathroom : chiamatacall bagno (art. 14503.AB) WCC (art. 14503.AB) WCRL : bathroom : led di rassicurazione presenza bagno WCRL reassurance LED WCR : bathroom : reset bagno WCR reset(art. (art.14504.AB) 14504.AB) Note: communication terminal, viaattraverso the inputsgliBED3C, Nota: the Il terminale di comunicazione, ingressiBED2C, BED1C, andBED1C, WCR and by suitably the BED3C, WCC BED2C, WCC, WCR e configuring mediante opportuna management software, can be used in the following configurazione dal software di gestione, può essere configurations: utilizzato nelle seguenti configurazioni: Traditional room -Stanza 3 bed tradizionale calls, 1 bathroom call and 1 bathroom reset (default configuration); - 3 chiamate letto, 1 chiamata bagno e 1 reset bagno - 1(configurazione bed call, 1 diagnostics call, 1 bathroom call and di default); 1 bathroom reset; - 2 chiamate letto, 2 chiamate diagnostiche, 1 reset bagno - 2 bed calls, 2 diagnostics calls; - 2 chiamate letto, 2 chiamate diagnostiche, 1 chiamata bagno, - 3 bed calls, 1 bathroom call; 4 bed chiamate -- 4 calls. letto, 1 chiamata bagno, - 5 chiamate letto. Corridor bathroom -Bagno 3 cabins and one bathroom reset; di corridoio -- 4 3 cabins. cabine e un reset bagno;

- 4 cabine.

Locallocale BUS voice unit connection BUS connessione fonia (voice unit module) (modulo fonico).

JP1: terminals for connection to display JP1:module morsetti02081.AB. per connessione a modulo

The unshielded Cat 3 telephone cable can be used for connecting Per buttons il collegamento dei pulsanti e delle lampade può essere the and lights.

utilizzato il cavo telefonico Cat 3 non schermato.

display 02081.AB

Local BUS voice unit connection (display module) BUS locale connessione fonia (modulo display). CALL-WAY

JP2: for connection to voice unit module 02082.AB. JP2: terminals morsetti per connessione a modulo fonico 02082.AB.

Communication terminal 02080.AB Terminal for communications and displaying calls, formed by display module and voice unit module, antibacterial treatment, power supply 24 Vdc (SELV). Equipped with flat cable for connecting the two modules, complete with double base for semi-recessed installation on light walls, on boxes with 60 mm distance between centres or on 3-module boxes, white

40,1 130

180

16,6

02080.AB

The drawings of the side views give the overall dimensions and the flush depth in mm

133

CALL-WAY System devices The display module enables sending and managing calls made by patients and/or by medical and paramedical personnel and displaying the data relating to the calls (room number, bed number, call level, events memory, etc.). The device, after a simple configuration, can be used without distinction as a room module or for control; it is equipped with 4 front buttons for assistance and emergency calls, presence and scrolling events list, it can be connected to 3 bed call buttons (made with push buttons 14501.AB or RJ45 sockets 14342.AB for the mini keypads 02089.AB), 1 bathroom call button (14503.AB) and 1 bathroom call cancelling button (14504.AB). The display module moreover enables connecting the landing light 02084 to signal nurse present, bathroom call and room call. On stand-by (that is to say when no operations are carried out on the device), the display shows the current time both in on-line mode and VDE-0834 (if the network contains at least one PC). The device is antibacterial and ensures full hygiene thanks to the action of the silver ions (AG+), pre-

venting the formation and spread of germs, bacteria, viruses and fungi. To maintain the hygiene and effectiveness of its antibacterial action, clean the product regularly.

Technical data supply voltage current absorption Lamp output current absorption LED output current absorption Mini keypad current absorption operating temperature

24 Vdc SELV ± 20% 70 mA 250 mA max 250 mA max 3 x 30 mA (30 mA each) 5°C - + 40°C (indoor)

Conformity to Standards EMC directive Standards EN 60950-1, EN 61000-6-1, EN 61000-6-3 Front view 02081.AB

Display 02081.AB Ore // Hour Numero Ward dinumber reparto.

Stato audio (canale Audio state fonico o musicale (activated phonic attivato con or music channel with set volume indicazione del livello diindication) volume).

Minuti / / Minutes Numero Room dinumber camera.

Numero Bed di letto. number

Presenza Remote remota. control

Nurse in the room Presenza in camera.

Indicazione del tipo di chiamata: Call type: = Presence Presenza = Assistance Assistenza = Emergency Emergenza = Bathroom Chiamata bagno call = Diagnostics Chiamata diagnostica call (chiamata call) tecnica) (technical

Posizione, lista, Position of nella the call dell’evento in the list of corrente the counter (chiamate, guasti, ecc.)

INPUTS/OUTPUTS INGRESSI / USCITE. BUZ : external : pilotaggio buzzer esterno. BUZ buzzer piloting G : lampada fuoriporta (presenza infermiera) G : outdoor lamp (nurse presence) W : lampada fuoriporta (chiamata bagno) W : outdoor lamp (bed call) R : lampada fuoriporta (chiamata R : outdoor lamp (room/bed call) camera/letto) G2 : lampada fuoriporta (chiamata G2 : outdoor lamp (emergency/diagnostics call) emergenza/diagnostica) BED3L : bed 3 reassurance LED BED3L : bed : led3dicall rassicurazione letto 3 BED3C (art. 14501.AB o 14342.AB) BED3C : bed : chiamata letto 3 (art. BED2L 2 reassurance LED14501.AB o 14342.AB) BED2L : bed : led2dicall rassicurazione letto 2 BED2C (art. 14501.AB o 14342.AB) BED2C : bed : chiamata letto 2 (art. BED1L 1 reassurance LED14501.AB o 14342.AB) BED1L : bed : led1dicall rassicurazione letto 1 BED1C (art. 14501.AB o 14342.AB) BED1C : bathroom : chiamatareassurance letto 1 (art. LED 14501.AB o 14342.AB) WCCL WCCL : bathroom : led di rassicurazione bagno WCC call (art. 14503.AB) WCC : bathroom : chiamatareassurance bagno (art. LED 14503.AB) WCRL WCRL : bathroom : led di rassicurazione presenza bagno WCR reset (art. 14504.AB)

BUS BUS. +, ::Alimentazione +, –– Power supply 24 24 Vdc Vdc SELV. SELV D1, D2 ::Collegamento dati. Data connection Voice connection F1, F2 ::Collegamento fonia. M1, M2 M2 ::Collegamento Music speakerdiffusione connection M1, musicale.

134

BED3C

BED2L

BED2C

BED1L

BED1C WCR

WCRL

BED3L

LAMP G W R G2

WCC

: reset bagno (art. 14504.AB)

WCCL

WCR

- OUT +

+ OUT (24 Vdc SELV): connection for comuni V d.c. SELV): collegamento common power supply di alimentazione unità dielements chiamata of bedroom/bathroom call units letto/bagno (14501.AB, 14503.AB), reset (14501.AB, 14503.AB), bathroom bagno (14504.AB) e lampade fuori porta reset (14504.AB) and outdoor lamp (02084) (02084) – ::collegamento negative connection passive unit qualora negativoforunità passive when required richiesto

BUZ

POWER SUPPLY ALIMENTAZIONE.

• Push-button A: Scrolling through events list (in the configuration phase: confirms operation). • Push-button B: Emergency call • Push-button C: Normal or care call (in the configuration phase: increase/ decrease and yes/no). • Push-button D: Nurse present (in the configuration phase: increase/ decrease and yes/no).

Contatore Call countereventi (chiamate, ecc.)

Connections 02081.AB

Note: the communication terminal, via the inputs BED3C, BED2C, BED1C, WCC and WCR and by suitably configuring Nota: Il terminale di comunicazione, attraverso gli ingressi the management software,WCC, can be used the following BED3C, BED2C, BED1C, WCR e in mediante configurations: opportuna configurazione dal software di gestione, può Traditional roomnelle seguenti configurazioni: essere utilizzato -Stanza 3 bed tradizionale calls, 1 bathroom call and 1 bathroom reset (default configuration); - 3 chiamate letto, 1 chiamata bagno e 1 reset bagno - 1(configurazione bed call, 1 diagnostics call, 1 bathroom call and di default); 1 - 2bathroom chiamatereset; letto, 2 chiamate diagnostiche, 1 reset bagno; -- 2 bed calls, 2 diagnostics calls; 2 chiamate letto, 2 chiamate diagnostiche, 1 chiamata - 3bagno; bed calls, 1 bathroom call; -- 4 bed calls. 4 chiamate letto, 1 chiamata bagno; Corridor bathroom - 5 chiamate letto. - 3 cabins and one bathroom reset; Bagno di corridoio - 4 cabins.

- 3 cabine e un reset bagno; - 4 cabine.

The unshielded Cat 3 telephone cable can be used for conPer il collegamento necting the buttons dei andpulsanti lights. e delle lampade può essere

utilizzato il cavo telefonico Cat 3 non schermato.

– +

Local BUS voice unit connection BUS locale connessione fonia (display (modulomodule) display). JP2: for connection toavoice unit JP2: terminals morsetti per connessione modulo module 02082.AB. fonico 02082.AB.

CALL-WAY System devices Display module 02081.AB Display module for viewing calls, 4 buttons for scrolling, call, priority call and cancellation, antibacterial treatment, 24 Vdc power supply (SELV). Complete with single base for semi-recessed installation on light walls, on boxes with 60 mm distance between centres or on 3-module boxes, white

40,1 130

16,6

CALL-WAY

02081.AB

Removable terminal 02085

Removable spare terminal with 6+2 screw pins, for display module

02085

The drawings of the side views give the overall dimensions and the flush depth in mm

135

CALL-WAY System devices Voice unit module

Technical data

The device, installed in the single room and powered directly by the display module 02081.AB, enables hands-free communication between patient and nurse and between nurses; via the voice unit module it is moreover possible to make room, ward and general announcements and broadcast a music channel with the possibility of adjusting the listening volume. The device is equipped with 4 front buttons to activate voice communication, switch on, off and adjust the volume (decrease and increase) of the music channel. It is connected to the display module 02081.AB by means of the flat cable supplied.

supply voltage (from display module 02081.AB) current absorption Speaker output power Speakers operating temperature

Conformity to Standards EMC directive Standards EN 60950-1, EN 61000-6-1, EN 61000-6-3

Front view 02082.AB

Combinations of display module 02081.AB with voice unit module 02082.AB

5 Vdc ± 5% 5 mA 0.15 W/16 Ω 2 x 8 Ω -250 mW in series 5°C - + 40°C (indoor)

Vertical installation

Horizontal installation

• Push-button E: Switching music channel on/off and controlling voice direction (press to speak). • Push-button F: Decrease volume (music channel only). • Push-button G: Increase volume (music channel only). • Push-button H: Voice communication.

BED3C

BED2L

BED2C

BED1L

BED1C

WCRL

WCR

WCC

BED3L

BUZ

LAMP G W R G2

02081.AB

WCCL

Connections 02082.AB with 02081.AB

- OUT +

FLAT CAVOCABLE FLAT

To the voice module 02082.AB Perconnect connessione delunit modulo fonia 02082.AB al to the display module 02081.AB.

modulo display 02081.AB.

– +

Local BUS voice unit connection BUS locale connessione fonia 02081 (display module) 02081.AB (modulo display).

JP2: terminals for connection to voice unit

JP2: module morsetti per connessione a modulo 02082.AB. fonico 02082.AB.

Local BUS voice unit connection BUS locale connessione fonia. JP1: to display JP1:terminals morsettifor perconnection connessione a modulo module 02081.AB.

display 02081.AB.

136

CALL-WAY System devices Voice unit module 02082.AB Voice unit module with 4 buttons for activating and controlling music and activating voice communication, antibacterial treatment, equipped with flat cable for connecting to the display module, complete with single base for wall installation, white

130

23,5

CALL-WAY

02082.AB

The drawings of the side views give the overall dimensions and the flush depth in mm

137

CALL-WAY System devices Corridor display Display for viewing of events that can occur during system operation. The viewable events are: • calls • presences • failures • alarms At rest, the default configuration has an analogue clock or a screensaver displayed, if any system events occur the display changes and their list is shown. It is possible to associate the views with an acoustic signal, in the form of both an audible alarm and a voice announcement.

The display and acoustic signals are fully customizable in terms of: • type of display at rest (time, customized text, background images, etc.) • size and colour of the text • description of the types of event • blinking of the types of event • duration, tone and repetition of the audible alarm • content of the voice messages It is to be anchored to a wall or ceiling with a fixing bracket, supplied separately.

Fixing bracket Wall fixing bracket for corridor display for Call-Way system.

Ethernet serial converter The device transfers data from the secondary line to a PC in corridor display mode.

Front view 02079 NETWORK CONNECTION COLLEGAMENTO RETE TO ETHERNET SWITCH VERSO SWITCH ETHERNET (UTP cable) (cavo UTP)

Technical data rated supply voltage current absorption max terminal cable section operating temperature relative humidity during operation

Technical specifications

12-24 Vdc ± 10% 200 mA 2.5 mm2 5°C - + 40°C (indoor) max. 90%

ETHERNET

02079 ETHERNET / RS485 SNIFFER

Call-Way

– +

• 9 modules of 17.5 mm

Conformity to Standards EMC directive Standards EN 55022, EN 55024

138

+, systemalimentazione power supply +, – : ingressi di terminals sistema D1, D2 collegamento : data connection D1, D2: dati

RS232

–

Auxiliary outputs uscite ausiliarie perfor power equipment neighbors alimentazione apparati vicini

CALL-WAY System devices Corridor display 02097

Display to show the events of the Call-Way system, wall mounting. Supplied without fixing bracket

02097

Fixing bracket Wall fixing bracket for display for Call-Way system

CALL-WAY

02098

Ethernet serial converter 02079

Ethernet/RS485 interface installation on DIN rail (60715 TH35), occupies 9 modules size 17.5 mm

02079

The drawings of the side views give the overall dimensions and the flush depth in mm

139

CALL-WAY System devices Mini keypad Mini keypad for nursing staff with an anti-strangulation function and two buttons for switching a light on and off.

Call button The device performs the function of calling nursing personnel and patient reassurance by means of a specific pilot lamp. It is connected by conventional wiring to the display module 02081. AB or the communication terminal 02080.AB. NOTE The display module and the communication terminal are provided for connecting call buttons with three outputs capable of drawing a maximum current of 100 mA each (the other two outputs are used for connecting the ceiling pull and the call cancelling button). If there are any rooms with more than three beds, NC configured bed call modules can be connected in parallel, thus losing the view on the display of the bed that made the call. Or you can use a card with 8 inputs/8 outputs.

Pull-cord call button The device is equipped with 1.5 m of cord together with a red disc and it is usually installed in bathrooms and showers. It is connected by traditional wiring to the display module 02081.AB or to the communication terminal 02080.AB for the room which acts as an interface with the Bus line.

Cancellation button The device performs the function of cancelling the call and signalling the presence of personal to the system; it is equipped with a buzzer for the acoustic signal if calls come from other rooms when the health personnel are not in the control room (calls are forwarded to the room where the personnel are providing assistance). It is connected by traditional wiring to the display module 02081.AB or to the communication terminal 02080.AB for the room which acts as an interface with the Bus line.

140

Technical data supply voltage current absorption

24 Vdc ± 20% SELV 30 mA max

Conformity to Standards LV Directive, EMC Directive Standards EN 60950-1, EN 61000-6-3, EN 61000-6-1

Technical data supply voltage current absorption

24 Vdc ± 20% SELV 30 mA max

Conformity to Standards LV Directive, EMC Directive Standards EN 60950-1, EN 61000-6-3, EN 61000-6-1

Technical data supply voltage current absorption

24 Vdc ± 20% SELV 125 mA max

Conformity to Standards LV Directive, EMC Directive Standards EN 60950-1, EN 61000-6-3, EN 61000-6-1

CALL-WAY System devices Mini keypads 02089.AB Mini keypad with 2 light controls, anti-bacterial material, anti-strangulation function

02089.AB

Call button 14501.AB Call button for NO and NC circuits with red reassurance light, antibacterial treatment, white - 2 modules 46,5 36

CALL-WAY

14501.AB

Pull-cord call button 14503.AB Pull-cord call button for NO and NC circuits with red reassurance light, antibacterial treatment, white - 2 modules 46,5 36

14503.AB

Cancellation button with buzzer 14504.AB Cancellation button for NO and NC circuits with acoustic signal for receiving other calls and green indicator light, antibacterial treatment, white - 2 modules 46,5 36

14504.AB

The drawings of the side views give the overall dimensions and the flush depth in mm

141

CALL-WAY System devices Landing LED lamp

Conformity to Standards

The device, installed in hallways and near room doors, uses colour combinations to show the different types of calls made by patients or the nursing staff and any diagnostic messages.

LV Directive, EMC Directive Standards EN 60950-1, EN 61000-6-1, EN 61000-6-3

CALLER

TYPE OF CALL

IDENTIFICATION (DIN VDE 0834-1:2000-04)

Normal call Nurse call

PATIENTS

The patient makes a call from the room to the nurse's station. The patient (or a family member), button on the communication presses the terminal or on the display module (it is equivalent to a call from a keypad). The patient makes a call from the bathroom to the nurse's station.

Call for assistance

The nurse, with presence inserted, repeats the call from the mini keypad or the button on the communication terminal or display module. The nurse, with presence in bathroom inserted, repeats the call from the bathroom.

Bathroom/WC assistance call ASSIGNED STAFF (nurse) Doctor call (emergency) Emergency call

Diagnostics call

LIGHT ON steady

The nurse must hold down the call button for 3 seconds or press, again for 3 sec and with presence button on the communication inserted, the terminal or display module. The nurse, with presence in bathroom inserted, must pull the bathroom ceiling pull-cord for approximately 3 sec.

Bathroom/WC doctor call

142

CALL METHOD

Bathroom/WC call

Emergency call (second presence)

DIAGNOSTICS

WARNING

LIGHT flashing at intervals of 1 sec

Possible when connecting an electro-medical instrument with a clean contact output.

LIGHT flashing at intervals of 0.3 sec

CALL-WAY System devices Landing LED lamp 02084

Landing LED lamp, four colours (green, white, red, amber), wall installation

CALL-WAY

02084

The drawings of the side views give the overall dimensions and the flush depth in mm

143

CALL-WAY System devices Line coupler The device enables interfacing between the Ethernet and the secondary backbone of the system in order to share and/or transfer the data messages between the modules; in addition, it creates functional separation between the backbones (if a line coupler shorts the other backbones continue to work correctly). The device is equipped with three LEDs that enable displaying the state of operation. Each line coupler can be connected with up to 127 devices (display modules, communication terminals, telephone couplers) of the Call-way system.

Technical data 02094 supply voltage current absorption operating temperature relative humidity during operation

Technical specifications • 9 modules of 17.5 mm

Conformity to Standards LV Directive, EMC Directive, Standards EN 60950-1, EN 61000-6-1, EN 61000-6-3

Front view 02094

NO NC C

02094 ADL - EF COUPLER

Call-Way

M2 M1 F2 F1 D2 D1

SECONDARY BACKBONE DORSALE SECONDARIA

supply terminals +, – : system ingressipower alimentazione di sistema data connection D1, D2 D2:: collegamento dati F1,F2 connection F1, F2:: telephone collegamento fonia M1,M2 connection M1, M2:: music collegamento musica

144

– +

12-24 Vdc ± 10% 250 mA 5°C - + 40°C (indoor) max. 90%

– – + +

AUX POWER OUTPUTS USCITE AUX SUPPLY ALIMENTAZIONE +, outputs for +, +, +, –, –, ––::auxiliary uscite ausiliarie perpower equipment neighbors alimentazione apparati vicini

CALL-WAY System devices Line coupler with Ethernet and sound system management 02094

Line coupler with Ethernet and voice control, 24 Vdc power supply, installation on DIN rail (60715 TH35), occupies 9 modules of 17.5 mm

CALL-WAY

02094

The drawings of the side views give the overall dimensions and the flush depth in mm

145

CALL-WAY System devices Telephone coupler This device is used to interface the system with paging devices and telephone switchboards, to transmit a music channel or make announcements in the single rooms and single wards or general announcements using normal telephones. It allows calls by medical staff to the room and handles two-way communication. The telephone coupler allows communication with fixed telephones via a PABX interface while the connection to the VOX local telephone is made directly via dedicated terminals and regardless of whether there is a PABX interface.

Front view 02078

Technical data supply voltage current absorption operating temperature

24 Vdc ± 20% SELV 75 mA 5°C - + 40°C (indoor)

Technical specifications • 9 modules of 17.5 mm

Conformity to Standards EMC directive Standards EN 60950-1, EN 61000-6-1, EN 61000-6-3

TRIMMER TRIMMER.

•• NOTICE: volume of calling in progress towards ANNUNCI:notice volume annunci vocali delle chiamate in corsothe phone interface (PABX). verso l’interfaccia telefonica (PABX). • MUSIC: volume for notice channel/sound system • MUSICA: volume verso canale annunci/diffusione musicale. • SOUND: audio volume from sound to local phone (VOX) FONIA: volume audiofron da fonia a telefono (VOX). •• VOX: sound volume phone interfacelocale (PABX) or local • phone VOX: volume (VOX) fonia da interfaccia telefonica (PABX) o da

•• TONE: volume for free/busylibero/occupato state fron local TONO: tone volume toni segnalazione phone (VOX)locale (VOX). da telefono • GONG: tone volume for notice signalling or in sound • GONG: volume tono segnalazione di un annuncio mode switch

o di entrata in modalità fonia.

TRIMMER: Regolazione TRIMMER

telefono locale (VOX).

clockwise rotation  = volume increasing Rotazione in senso orario = aumento del volume anticlockwise rotation  = volume decreasing

Rotazione in senso antiorario = diminuzione del volume

DL5

DL3

S1 DIP

DL1

DL7

PLS TEL M/F RUN

GONG

TONO

VOX

S1 S1.

FONIA

REGOLAZIONI

ANNUNCI MUSICA

INDIRIZZO

Dip-switch 1,2,3,4,5:impostazione address phone Dip-switch 1,2,3,4,5: indirizzo coupler set telefonico. accoppiatore Dip-switch 6,7,8: set of the signal (GONG) Dip-switch for message6,7,8: noticeimpostazione (1,2,3 tones)del tipo di

02078 PHONE COUPLER

segnalazione acustica (gong) di avviso messaggi (1,2,3 toni).

Call-Way

XH. XH

IN, GND: Ingresso annunci vocali da PC

XH IN GND

XM IN GND

XV A B

XL A B

IN, GND: notice input from PC (file WAVE). (WAVE file) Segnale sbilanciato livello tipico 2 Vpp Unbalanced signal typical 2 level Vpp (uscita cuffie PC).output) (PC hearphones

M2 M1 F2

XB F1 D2 D1

–

XB. XB +,- : Alimentazione 24 V d.c. SELV

+, : Power supply 24 Vdc SELV D1,– D2: Collegamento dati. D1, D2 : Data connection F1, F2 F2: Collegamento fonia. F1, : Voice connection M1, M2 Music speaker connection M2: :Collegamento diffusione musicale.

XL XL.

linea telefonica analogico Alimentazione 29 mA dc, A, B: Collegamento phone line connection as an come analoginterno extension PABX.PABX. 29 mA dc supply voltage through impegnosynthetic medianteinductor, induttore multi-frequency/pulse sintetico, composizionecomposition multifrequenza/impulsi.

XM. XH IN, GND: canale annunci/diffusione IN, GND: Ingresso notice channel/sound system input. musicale. Segnale livelloVpp 2 Vpp (uscita Unbalanced signalsbilanciato typical 2 level (PC output) cuffiehearphones PC).

XV. A, phone connection (VOX). 27 mA dc supply voltage A, B: local Collegamento telefono locale (VOX). Alimentazione 27 mA dc

ESPA 4.4.4 interface

Technical data

Serial interface for connection without PC between Call-Way and a DECT/pager system or equipped with ESPA 4.4.4 interface, installation on DIN rail (60715 TH35), occupies 9 modules size 17.5 mm. The device should be connected to the secondary backbone and forwards calls to apparatus that manages the ESPA 4.4.4 protocol on serial line RS232.

Conformity to Standards

Technical specifications

EMC Directive Standards EN 60950-1, EN 61000-6-1, EN 61000-6-3

• 1 power supply detected LED • occupies 9 modules size 17.5 mm

rated supply voltage current absorption max terminal cable section operating temperature relative humidity during operation

Front view 02095

12-24 Vdc ± 10% 40 mA 2.5 mm2 5°C - + 40°C (indoor) max. 90%

RS232 per ESPA 4.4.4

GND RX TX

– +

02095

ESPA 4.4.4 GND RS232 line connections TX : collegamenti linea RS232 RX

SERIAL DATA INTERFACE ESPA 4.4.4

Call-Way

M2 M1 F2 F1 D2 D1

SECONDARY BACKBONE DORSALE SECONDARIA

+, – : system supply terminals ingressi power alimentazione di sistema D1, D2 data connection D2::collegamento dati

146

F1,F2 telephone connection F1, F2:: collegamento fonia M1,M2 music connection M1, M2:: collegamento musica

– +

– – + +

AUX POWER SUPPLY OUTPUTS USCITE AUX ALIMENTAZIONE auxiliary outputsper for power +, +, –, – :: uscite ausiliarie alimentazione apparati vicini equipment neighbors

CALL-WAY System devices Telephone coupler 02078

Telephone coupler, 24 Vdc power supply, installation on DIN rail (60715 TH35), occupies 9 modules size 17.5 mm

ESPA 4.4.4 interface 02095

Serial interface for connection without PC between Call-Way and a DECT/pager system or equipped with ESPA 4.4.4 interface, installation on DIN rail (60715 TH35), occupies 9 modules size 17.5 mm

02095

The drawings of the side views give the overall dimensions and the flush depth in mm

147

CALL-WAY

02078

CALL-WAY System devices 8-channel indication connection module

Technical data

The device has 8 call/reset inputs and 8 outputs for landing lamps; there are also 4 technical inputs (potential alarms from electro-medical equipment). Call/reset inputs and lamps can be configured only via Callway software and independently in terms of the room they are associated with and the function they need to perform. The only constraint is that all card channels must belong to the same ward. Each call/reset input has an output for an LED or reassurance light indicating the corresponding button has been pressed. All inputs can be configured as normally open or normally closed.

rated supply voltage current absorption max LED output current max lamp output current operating temperature relative humidity during operation

12-24 Vdc ± 10% 20 mA 100 mA 250 mA 5°C - + 40°C (indoor) max. 90%

Technical specifications • 1 power supply detected LED • occupies 8 modules size 17.5 mm

Conformity to Standards EMC directive Standards EN 60950-1, EN 61000-6-1, EN 61000-6-3

Front view 02096

XAB XAB XA7 XA7 GND +V XA6 XA6 XA5 XA5 GND +V XA4 XA4 XA3 XA3 GND +V XA2 XA2 XA1 XA1 GND +V 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 XB : XA : XT : XS : XF :

XB connector terminal description Descrizione morsetto connettore XB

BUS DI SISTEMA / SYSTEM BUS INGRESSI / INPUTS (1-CALL, 2-LED) INGRESSI TECNICI / TECHNICAL INPUTS USCITE / OUTPUTS BUS FONIA /SPEECH BUS

XS8 XS7 XS6 XS5 XS4 XS3 XS2 XS1 XSC XT6 XT5 XT2 XT1

XF8 XF7 XF6 XF5 XF4 XF3 XF2 XF1

XB M2

XT8 XT7 XT4 XT3

–

D1 D2 F1 F2 M1 M2

– +

Description of terminals +, – : system power supply inputs D1, D2 : data connection F1, F2 : voice unit connection M1, M2 : music connection Xan-1 (*) : call input (bed/bathroom) Xan-2 (*) : reassurance LED output (bed/bathroom) XT1, 2, 5, 6 : technical/diagnostic inputs for alarms from external devices XS1....8 : landing indicator lamp outputs +V / GND : power supply positive and negative for call unit (*) n: from 1 to 8 v. terminals.

148

Data/Telephone/Music Dati/Fonia/Musica SSTP SSTP 4cp 4cp

Power supply (2 (2 xx 1,5 1,5 mm mm22)) Alimentazione

CALL-WAY System devices 8-channel indication connection module 02096

Programmable card 8 inputs 8 outputs for managing multiple rooms, installation on DIN rail (60715 TH35), occupies 8 modules size 17.5 mm

CALL-WAY

02096

The drawings of the side views give the overall dimensions and the flush depth in mm

149

CALL-WAY System devices Power supply The power supply is auto-protected against short circuits and can be installed in a junction box or on EN 50022 rails with the specific support provided. It is recommended to always have a safety switch for the electric power supply circuit of the device 02090.

Connections 02090

Technical specifications • rated supply voltage: 110-120 / 220-240 Vac, 50/60Hz • consumption: - 110-120 Vac: 3.2 A - 220-340 Vac: 1.6 A • output voltage: 24 Vdc SELV: voltage adjustment: 21-28 Vdc, tolerance: ± 1% • total max output current: 6.5 A • operating temperature: -10°C - + 60°C (indoor) • dimensions: 199 x 110 x 50 mm (AC)

Conformity to Standards

L N

-V -V +V +V

LV directive Standard EN 60950-1 EMC directive Standards EN 61000 - 6 - 1, EN 61000 - 6 - 3 L-N L-N:: Morsetti 120-230 diV alimentazione power supply 120-230 V terminals

Contatto di Earthing messacontact a terra -V: power negativo supply negative output -V : Uscita alimentazione

150

V ADJ

Output Trimmer voltage regolazione adjustment tensione di uscita trimmer Green LED: LED verde: on withcon full brightness: •• acceso piena luminosità: normal operation normale funzionamento. • on with faint brightness: • acceso con luminosità tenue: device in state of protection

dispositivo in stato di protezione.

+V:: power output +V Uscitasupply positivopositive alimentazione

CALL-WAY System devices Power supply 02090

Power supply unit with 24 Vdc output SELV 6,5 A, power supply 110-120/220-240 Vac 50/60 Hz

CALL-WAY

02090

Cable category 5e FTP 03061

Cable Cat. 5e, shielded with 4 pairs, 24 AWG with LSZH sheath, grey - 305 m

03061

The drawings of the side views give the overall dimensions and the flush depth in mm

151

CALL-WAY System devices Prismatic indicator units - 14387... To be used, for the Call-way system, with lamps 14771

Installation of prismatic indicator units with flush mounting box 3 modules V71303 with joint V71562

Technical data lamp supply voltage lamp current absorption

33*

Conformity to Standards

14387.B

33*

24 Vac 3 W / 24 Vac

14387.R

286,5*

LV directive

V71303 x3 + joint V71562

14612 x3

14387.V

14652.01 x3

*Dimensions in mm

Installation of prismatic indicator units for landing indicator Installation of prismatic indicator units with Isoset wallmounting box 2+2+2 modules - vertical installation

71 mm

204

71 mm

14387.B

14387.R

14387.V

14603 x 3 14387.B

14387.R 14387.V

14813 14644

152

CALL-WAY System devices Prismatic indicator units 14387.B

Prismatic indicator unit 230 V~ 3 W max for lamps 14770, 14771, 14776 and 14777, white diffuser - 2 modules. Supplied without lamp

14387.R 14387.V

As above, red diffuser As above, green diffuser

56 24

14387.R

14387.V

CALL-WAY

14387.B

The drawings of the side views give the overall dimensions and the flush depth in mm

153

CALL-WAY Devices Call button* The device performs the function of calling nursing personnel and patient reassurance by means of a specific pilot lamp. It is equipped with a 7-pin DIN socket for the mini keypad and it is usually installed near to a headboard. It is connected by traditional wiring to the display module 02081 or to the communication terminal 02080 for the room which acts as an interface with the Bus line and the landing lamp.

Technical data supply voltage current absorption

24 Vdc ± 20% SELV 30 mA max

Conformity to Standards EMC directive

* Spare for first generation Call-way, compatible only with 02080 and 02081

Protocol converter* The device enables interfacing the control unit (PC) with the system and generating the main backbone. The protocol converter is connected to the control unit (PC) via the serial cable DB9M-DB9F supplied and to the main backbone with the Bus cable. Each protocol converter can manage up to 127 line couplers 02092.

Front view 02091 LED RS232 LED RS485 RJ45: pin 1,2,3 = + pin 4 = D2 pin 5 = D1 pin 6,7,8 = -

LED RUN

020

ITÀ RS CE 232 GND NT RA LE

CO NV ER TIT RS OR 23 ED 485 2 I

SERIAL PORT TO PC: SERIALE VERSO PC: DB9M-DB9F connector or omale Connettore DB9M-DB9F terminal screw con terminals morsettowith maschio terminali a vite

E P S485 RIN C D2 IPA L

E –

Technical specifications N

EMC directive Standards EN 55022, EN 55024,

Conformity to Standards

DORSALE

MAIN BACKBONE: PRINCIPALE: RJ45 connector Connettore RJ45 or o male terminal withcon morsetto maschio screw terminals terminali a vite

I R ÀT S2 G C 3 N EN 2 D TR R X AL TX E

• supply voltage: 24 V d.c. ± 20% SELV • current absorption: 25 mA • operating temperature: 5°C - + 40°C (indoor) • ABS box, for desktop use • dimensions: 82x110x40 mm

D2 D1 – +

9 pole male Connettore “D” connector "D" femmina a 9 poli

Collegamento dati Main backbone data connection dorsale principale TX RX GND

Power supply Alimentazione 24VVdc 24 d.c.SELV SELV

2 3 5

Schema collegamento cavo Cable connection diagram perforPC maschio PCcon withmorsetto male terminal con screw terminali a vite with terminals

9 pole female Connettore “D” connector "D" maschio a 9 poli

* Spare for first generation Call-way 154

CALL-WAY Devices Call button with DIN socket* 14502

Call button with 7-pin DIN socket for connection with mini keypad, red reassurance light - 2 modules 46,5 36

14502

* Spare for first generation Call-way, compatible only with 02080 and 02081 Mini keypads* Simple mini keypad. (IP54 protection rating) Simple mini keypad with 1 light control. (IP54 protection rating) Simple mini keypad with 2 light controls. (IP54 protection rating)

CALL-WAY

∆ 02086 ∆ 02087 ∆ 02088

∆ 02086

∆ 02087

∆ 02088

* Spares for first generation Call-way, compatible only with 02080, 02081 and 14502 Protocol converter* ∆ 02091

Protocol converter for connection to PC power supply 24 Vdc, complete with cable

∆ 02091

* Spare for first generation Call-way The drawings of the side views give the overall dimensions and the flush depth in mm

∆ Available until stocks last

155

CALL-WAY Antibacterial Plana devices Scope

Technical specifications

Control (switching on and off) of ohmic-inductive loads: • light circuits for: - lighting devices with incandescent lamps - lighting devices with fluorescent lamps, with and without power factor correction • dedicated circuits for: - motor-driven appliances (fans, extractor fans, suction hoods, etc.) - controlled socket outlets

• rated voltage: 250 V~ • rated current: - 10 A for the buttons - 16 AX for devices designed to control circuits of fluorescent lamps with power factor correction • contact opening gap: > 3 mm • insulation resistance: > 5 MΩ at 500 Vdc • dielectric strength: > 2000 V~ • minimum breaking capacity: 200 position changes at 1.25 In, 275 V~ cos ϕ 0.3 and 200 position changes at 1.2 In, 250 V~, with load of tungsten filament lamps (excluding buttons) • minimum electrical life: - 40,000 position changes at In, 250 V~, cos ϕ 0.6 - 10,000 position changes for devices marked 10 AX (5,000 for devices marked 16 AX) at In, 250 V~, with load of fluorescent lamps • balanced and silent rocking action for switches, inverters and buttons

To make systems pursuant to art. 4 of Italian Ministerial Decree 14/06/1989 no. 236 on the elimination of architectural barriers, use luminous controls.

Customizing the buttons of control devices VIMAR laser technology enables duplicating any symbol, logo or brand on the buttons of control devices with the highest accuracy and assurance of indelebility. The following are created by laser: • all the symbols of the articles in the catalogue • the symbols and lettering in the library • symbols, lettering, trademarks and logos on request

Pre-wired signalling unit for locating the control in the dark

Conformity to Standards LV directive Standard EN 60669-1

Load status signalling unit

14001.AB

00931

00936...

Connections of luminous 1P1-way switches with signalling unit

Funzione di localizzazione For switch location del comando al buio: in the dark: spia accesalit pilotsempre lamp always

di localizzazione ForFunzione switch location in the dark: del comando buio: pilot lamp unlitalwhen spia spenta a lampadaloads comandata the controlled is ON accesa

Funzione di operation segnalazione dello stato Indication of the state of appliances di visible funzionamento di utilizzatori not from the operating point: non in lit vista dalthe punto di comando: pilot lamp when controlled loads is ON spia accesa a lampada comandata accesa

L N

156

L N

CALL-WAY Antibacterial Plana devices Blank module 14041.AB Blank module, antibacterial treatment, white 20,5 10

14041.AB

1P 1-way switch 14001.AB 1P 16 AX 250 V~, lightable, replaceable button, antibacterial treatment, white 38,4 24

CALL-WAY

14001.AB

2P 1-way switch 14015.AB 2P 16 AX 250 V~, lightable, replaceable button, antibacterial treatment, white 38,4 24

14015.AB

The drawings of the side views give the overall dimensions and the flush depth in mm

157

CALL-WAY Antibacterial Plana devices Connections of luminous single-pole switches with signalling unit

Funzione di localizzazione For switch location in the dark:

Funzione di localizzazione For switch location del comando al buio: in the dark:

Funzione segnalazione stato Indication of the di operation statedello of appliances di funzionamento di utilizzatori not visible from the operating point:

lamp unlit al when delpilot comando buio:

spia sempre accesa pilot lamp always lit

the acontrolled is ON accesa spia spenta lampadaloads comandata

L N

non in di comando: pilot lamp lit vista when dal the punto controlled loads is ON

L N

Pre-wired signalling unit for locating the control in the dark

spia accesa a lampada comandata accesa L N

Load status signalling unit

14005.AB

00936...

00931

Connections of luminous two-pole switches with signalling unit For switch location Funzione di localizzazione in the dark: del comando al buio: spia lamp sempre accesa pilot always lit

Indication of the operation state appliances Funzione di segnalazione delloofstato not visible from thedioperating di funzionamento utilizzatoripoint: non in vista dal the punto di comando: pilot lamp lit when controlled loads is ON spia accesa a lampada comandata accesa

L N

158

L N

CALL-WAY Antibacterial Plana devices 1P 2-way switch 14005.AB 1P 16 AX 250 V~, lightable, replaceable button, antibacterial treatment, white 38,4 24

CALL-WAY

14005.AB

1P reversing switch 14013.AB 1P 16 AX 250 V~, lightable, replaceable button, antibacterial treatment, white 38,4 24

14013.AB

The drawings of the side views give the overall dimensions and the flush depth in mm

159

CALL-WAY Antibacterial Plana devices Single-pole buttons Pre-wired signalling unit for locating the control in the dark

Load status signalling unit

Connections of luminous singlepole buttons with signalling unit 110 V~ or 250 V~ Funzione di localizzazione

14008.AB

For switch location al in buio: the dark: del comando pilot always lit spialamp sempre accesa

L N

00931

160

00936...

CALL-WAY Antibacterial Plana devices 1P push button 14008.AB 1P NO 10 A 250 V~, lightable, replaceable button, antibacterial treatment, white 38,4 24

14008.AB

2-module interchangeable button 14022.AB Interchangeable button, 2 modules, ring lightable, antibacterial treatment, white

CALL-WAY

14022.AB

Special single-pole button 14052.AB Button 1P NO 10 A 250 V~, with pull-cord, with 1.5 m cord and knob, antibacterial treatment, white 37,3 25,5

14052.AB

The drawings of the side views give the overall dimensions and the flush depth in mm

161

CALL-WAY Antibacterial Plana devices Universal dimmer with potentiometer Technical specifications • Turning the load on/off with the incorporated button or normal buttons without pilot light when off; knob dimmering; • Soft start: gradual lighting from zero to maximum or preset lighting levels; • Flash start: used with compact fluorescent lamps, for switching on the lamps correctly, reducing any difficulties to a minimum; • Soft end: gradual passage from light to dark; • Adjustment of leading edge (LE): used with incandescent lamps, compact fluorescent lamps and compatible LED lamps, as well as L type electronic transformers; • Adjustment of trailing edge (TE): used with compatible loads such as fluorescent lamps, LED lamps or C type electronic transformers; • Protection against short-circuit when turning on together with flashing blowout detector; • Overheating protection with flashing blowout detector; • MASTER-SLAVE function: paying attention not to exceed maximum power controllable by each dimmer. A MASTER device can have up to 3 SLAVE devices for a maximum total load of 2000 W (VA) corresponding to 500 W/VA max connected to each of the 4 devices. When used with fluorescent or LED lamps, the maximum power controlled from the MASTER must not exceed 40W; • Not suitable for controlling motors (e.g. fans, ventilators); • If installing 2 dimmers in a single box, the loads that can be controlled by each dimmer must be reduced so that their total does not exceed the maximum power that can be controlled by a single device; • It should be used in dry, dust-free places at a temperature of between 0°C and +35°C.

14136.AB - Example of 3-wire connection L Portafusibile Fuse carrier

Regolatore MASTER MASTER dimmer

P L

Lampada Lamp

On/Off push button Pulsante On/Off

14136.AB - Example of 2-wire connection with load adaptor L Regolatore MASTER dimmer MASTER

Fuse carrier Portafusibile

Adattatore Load adaptor di carico

230 V~ 50 Hz

L P

On/Off push button Pulsante On/Off

Lamp Lampada

In this configuration, you need to use the load adaptor 01873 connected in parallel with the load.

Note The 2-wire connection must only be used for replacing dimmers in existing electrical systems where there is no neutral wire in the dimmer box.

Conformity to Standards LV directive, EMC directive, Standard EN 60669-2-1.

Controllable loads in 3-wire connection Controllable loads

LE (Leading Edge): start of phase

TE (Trailing Edge): end of phase

Incandescent

40 to 500 W

40 to 300 W

Compact fluorescent

10 to 100 W, max 5 lamps

10 to 200 W, max 10 lamps

LED

3 to 100 W, max 5 lamps

3 to 200 W, max 10 lamps

Electronic transformers for halogen

40 ÷ 300 W, max 3 inductive transformers L

40 ÷ 300 W, max 5 capacitative transformers C

Power supplies for LEDs (01874, 01875)

max 10 power supplies

NOT applicable

Step lights (02662)

max 10 lamps

NOT applicable

Controllable loads in 2-wire connection Controllable loads

LE (Leading Edge): start of phase

TE (Trailing Edge): end of phase

Compact fluorescent lamps (with load adaptor 01873)

10 to 40 W, max 2 lamps

LED (with load adaptor 01873)

3 to 40 W, max 2 lamps

For In this configuration, you need to use the load adaptor 01873 connected in parallel with the load.

162

CALL-WAY Antibacterial Plana devices Universal dimmer 14136.AB Universal dimmer 230 V~ 50 Hz for incandescent lamps 40-500 W, electronic transformers 40-300 VA, CFL lamps 10-200 W, LED lamps 3-200 W, for LED electronic power supplies, ON/OFF control with built-in push button or from multiple points with NO buttons, dimmering with built-in rotary potentiometer, minimum dimmering, location in the dark, antibacterial treatment, white

60,4 40,5

22,3

CALL-WAY

14136.AB

The drawings of the side views give the overall dimensions and the flush depth in mm

163

CALL-WAY Antibacterial Plana devices Italian standard socket outlets 250 V~ Application field Powering electrical appliances, lighting fixtures, etc.

Conformity to Standards Standard CEI 23-50 (IEC 60884-1)

Technical specifications of Italian standard socket outlets • rated voltage: 250 V~ • rated current: 10 A or 16 A • shuttered live socket-contacts (protection rating 2.1 standards CEI 23-16; with increased safety standards CEI 23-50) • insulation resistance tested at 500 Vdc: > 5 MΩ • dielectric strength: 2000 V~ • breaking capacity: 50 cycles (inserting and removing the plug) at 1.25 In 275 V~ cos φ 0.6 • electrical life: > 5,000 cycles (inserting and removing the plug) with rated voltage and current at cos φ 0.6 • resilient wrap socket-contacts • contact priority on socket or earth contacts

Foreign standard plugs and socket outlets

14208

14212

Italian standard plug type S10

•

Europlug 2P 2.5 A

•

Plug 2P+E 16 A 250 V~ German standard

•

Plug 2P+E 16 A 250 V~ combined German and French standard

•

Plug 2P 16 A 250 V~ combined German and French standard

•

Plug 2P+E 16 A 250 V~ French standard

•

• Standard plug that can be coupled with the socket outlet

Conformity to Standards

Foreign standard VIMAR plugs

• German standard socket outlets: standard DIN VDE 0620-1 • French standard socket outlets: standard NF C 61-314

• 00230: 2P+E 16 A 250 V~ German standard • 00231: 2P+E 16 A 250 V~ combined German and French standard • 00232: 2P+E 16 A 250 V~ French standard • 00241: 2P+E 16 A 250 V~ combined German and French standard

164

CALL-WAY Antibacterial Plana devices Italian standard socket outlets 14203.AB Bpresa SICURY 2P+E 16 A 250 V~, Italian standard P17/11, anti-bacterial material, white 14210.AB 2P+E 16 A 250 V~ SICURY socket outlet, universal, for 2P 2,5 A Europlugs, 2P and 2P+E 10 A and 16 A Italian standard plugs, 2P+E 16 A German standard plugs, with antibacterial treatment, white - 2 modules. Earth connection is not realized with 2P+E 16 A 250 V~ French standard plug

34,5 24

14203.AB

35,5 25

CALL-WAY

14210.AB

Foreign standard socket outlets 14208.AB 2P+E 16 A 250 V~ SICURY socket outlet, German standard, with antibacterial treatment, white - 2 modules 14212.AB 2P+E 16 A 250 V~ SICURY socket outlet, French standard, with antibacterial treatment, white - 2 modules

38,9 24,8

14208.AB

35,9 25,4

14212.AB

The drawings of the side views give the overall dimensions and the flush depth in mm

165

CALL-WAY Antibacterial Plana devices Socket outlet 250 V~ for dedicated lines Application field Tertiary environments such as offices, medical offices, clinics, hospitals and all places where there are dedicated lines to supply equipment whose operation must be guaranteed also in case of black-out (lines assisted by generators, lines fed by uninterruptible power supplies, etc.). They differ from common socket outlets in the colour of the front (orange, red or green), which allow you to visually distinguish dedicated supply lines at the rated voltage of 230 V~.

Currently, at European level, there are no regulations for matching the colour of the socket outlet and the type of power supply; instead, a differentiation by field of application is in practice: • Orange: power supply protected by network/generator set with an isolating transformer • Red: continuous power supply via UPS (uninterruptible power supply) with an isolating transformer. • Green: safety power supply via network/generator set

Conformity to Standards Standard CEI 23-50 (IEC 60884-1)

Examples of use 14210.AB.A and 14210.AB.R

14210.AB.R

Shaver supply unit

Conformity to Standards

They incorporate an isolating transformer of power 20 VA, protected against overload, short-circuit resistant and powered via button operated directly from the plug inserted into the socket outlet. The secondary circuit, connected to the socket contacts, is separated from the primary power supply circuit by double insulation : this means that any additional protection on the socket contacts (shutters) is superfluous.

LV directive Standard EN 61558-2-5

Socket outlet inputs standard per standard americano For spine 2P 152P A 125 V~ American standard spinotti piatti 15 A 125 V~flat non polarizzato plugs with non-polarized blades

166

per 2P 2,5 A For eurospine 2P 2,5 A Europlugs

• power supply 230 V~ 50-60 Hz • output voltages: - 230 V~ for Europlugs 2P 2.5 A - 120 V~ for plugs 2P 15 A 125 V~ American standard with non-polarised flat pins • available power: 20 VA • self-protected temperature operation • the shaver supply unit is protected against overload with a thermal cut-off device without automatic closing. After the protection has tripped the socket contacts receive no power; to close the circuit you must unplug the device that caused the overload and wait a few minutes for the transformer to cool.

12,7

Technical specifications

CALL-WAY Antibacterial Plana devices Socket outlets for dedicated power supply lines 14203.AB.R 2P+E 16 A 250 V~ SICURY Bpresa socket outlet, Italian standard P17/11, with antibacterial treatment, red 14210.AB.A 2P+E 16 A 250 V~ SICURY socket outlet, universal, for 2P 2,5 A Europlugs, 2P and 2P+E 10 A and 16 A Italian standard plugs, 2P+E 16 A German standard plugs, with antibacterial treatment, orange - 2 modules. Earth connection is not realized with 2P+E 16 A 250 V~ French standard plug 14210.AB.R As above, red 14210.AB.V As above, green

35,5

34,5

14203.AB.R

14210.AB.R

35,5

14210.AB.V

Shaver supply unit 14290.AB Shaver supply unit with 20 VA isolating transformer, supply voltage 230 V~ 50-60 Hz, 120 V~ output voltage for 2P 15 A 125 V~ American standard plugs with non-polarized flat blades, and 230 V~ output voltage for 2P 2,5 A Europlugs, with antibacterial treatment, white - 3 modules 38,4 24

14290.AB

The drawings of the side views give the overall dimensions and the flush depth in mm

167

CALL-WAY

14210.AB.A

CALL-WAY Antibacterial Plana devices Telephone socket outlet 14320 - 14321 Technical specifications - screw terminal connection

Telephone socket outlet diagrams L2

L2 TS

TX 2

14320 14320.AB RJ11 RJ11 6-position 4-conductor 6 posizioni 4 contatti

L1 L2

L1 TS T

14321 RJ12 6 posizioni 6 contatti

Example of use

USA - 2P UNIVERSALE

230 volt

168

Connections 14320.AB

14320

L1 TS

L2 TX

NOTE In the case of socket outlets connected as in the diagram, the line between L1 and TS is broken: if the telephone is unplugged from any socket, the ones downstream would remain disconnected. To get around this problem, you can simply plug in a bridge between L1 and TS.

CALL-WAY Antibacterial Plana devices Special socket outlet 14330.AB 2P 6 A 24 V (SELV) socket outlet for plug 01620 (pins ø 3 mm, distance between centres 12,4 mm), with antibacterial treatment, white. For auxiliary circuits

34,5 24

CALL-WAY

14330.AB

Telephone socket outlet 14320.AB RJ11 phone jack, 6-position 4-conductor (6/4), screw terminals, with antibacterial treatment, white

43,1 32,6

14320.AB

The drawings of the side views give the overall dimensions and the flush depth in mm

169

CALL-WAY Antibacterial Plana devices RJ45 sockets Cat. 6 UTP for workstations Field of application Construction of workstations aesthetically coordinated with the electrical system in the room.

Supported applications • Gigabit Ethernet (1000BASE-T); • Fast Ethernet (100BASE-TX); • Ethernet (10BASE-T); • 25/52/155 Mbps ATM; • 4/16/100 Mbps Token Ring; • all the supported applications for category 6 or class E.

RJ45 socket Cat. 6 UTP and FTP - Colour coding T568A 3a

T568A 1 2

T568B 1 2

Conformity to Standards B

Standards ANSIA/TIA/EIA 568 C, ISO/IEC 11801, CEI EN 50173

RJ45 sockets Cat. 6 FTP for workstations

14339.AB.14 - Technical specifications • Performance in Cat. 6; • cover for terminating conductors with: - colour coding to reduce the risk of incorrect connection; - snap closing that ensures completely locking the conductors and prevents sliding and potential deformation.

170

B A

B B A B A

2 1 B A

2 1 8 7

4 5 6 3

B A

4 5

Standards ANSIA/TIA/EIA 568 C, ISO/IEC 11801, CEI EN 50173

Conformity to Standards

• Gigabit Ethernet (1000BASE-T); • Fast Ethernet (100BASE-TX); • Ethernet (10BASE-T); • 25/52/155 Mbps ATM; • 4/16/100 Mbps Token Ring; • all the supported applications for category 6 or class E.

Supported applications

Construction of workstations aesthetically coordinated with the electrical system in the room.

B A

6 3

RJ45 socket Cat. 6 UTP and FTP - Assembly B

Field of application

8 7

8 7 2 1 6 3 4 5

• Performance in Cat. 6 with additional margin that enables supporting Gigabit applications; • cover for terminating conductors with: - colour coding to reduce the risk of incorrect connection; - snap closing that ensures completely locking the conductors and prevents sliding and potential deformation.

T. 5

RJ45 socket Cat. 6 UTP and FTP - Wiring

14339.AB.13 - Technical specifications

T568B 1 2

8 4a

T568A 1

T568B

8 4a

8 8

CALL-WAY Antibacterial Plana devices RJ45 socket Netsafe Cat. 6 UTP 14339.AB.13 RJ45 outlet with Netsafe connector, Cat. 6, unshielded, T568A/B universal wiring, 8 position, 110 type insulation-piercing terminals without tool use, with antibacterial treatment, white

39,8 29,3

RJ45 socket Netsafe Cat. 6 FTP 14339.AB.14 RJ45 outlet with Netsafe connector, Cat. 6, shielded, T568A/B universal wiring, 8 position, insulation-piercing terminals without tool use, with antibacterial treatment, white

CALL-WAY

14339.AB.13

39,8 29,3

14339.AB.14

The drawings of the side views give the overall dimensions and the flush depth in mm

171

CALL-WAY Antibacterial Plana devices RJ45 socket RJ45 socket for the connection between the communication terminal 02080.AB or the display module 02081.AB and the mini keypad 02089.AB.

TV-RD-SAT 5-2400 MHz coaxial sockets

Some examples of supported installation topologies

Field of application

With multiple socket outlets in cascade

• connection of user equipment in systems for the distribution of audio and video, analogue and digital, terrestrial, satellite and cable signals in the frequency band 5–2400 MHz • they enable connecting a single device (e.g. TV or SAT receiver) • they can be used in Web applications via satellite and, thanks to the return channel 5-40 MHz, also for interactive functions (hotel communications and cable TV) • the availability of direct socket outlets that allow the passage of direct current and control signals and through-line socket outlets available with three different attenuations enables optimum use in single or centralized systems structured according to any topology.

The range • 1 direct socket outlet that allows the passage of direct current and control signals (24 V 500 mA max) • 3 through-line socket outlets with: - connection attenuation 10 dB - connection attenuation 15 dB - connection attenuation 20 dB The through-line socket outlets become terminals if "closed" with the specific terminal resistor 16330. They allow the passage of direct current and control signals (24 V 500 mA max) through the line, but not through the user gateway (male connector).

With multiple shunted socket outlets Mixed cascade/shunted Multi-switch for distributing satellite signals Multi-switch for distributing mixed terrestrial and satellite signals Mixed cascade/shunted with IF-IF conversion unit for single-cable distribution of mixed terrestrial and satellite signals Mixed cascade/shunted with modular unit for channelling terrestrial and satellite programmes in 40-862 MHz band (terrestrial)

Technical specifications • frequency range: 5-2400 MHz • output: male connector • return channel in the 5-40 MHz band • shielding efficiency: class A • cable dimensions: - internal conductor ø 3 mm max - external insulating sheath: ø 5-7 mm

Conformity to Standards Standards EN 60728-1, EN 60728-4 EMC directive Standard EN 50083-2

How to connect Programmes - Applications

Programmes - Applications

• Terrestrial TV

• Terrestrial radio

male

Coaxial cable connection

172

male

Sintonizzatore radio

Programmes - Applications

• Cable TV (CATV) • Interactive hotel communications

• Satellite TV and radio

male

STB (Set Top Box) SCART cable connection

SAT

CALL-WAY Antibacterial Plana devices RJ45 socket 14342.AB RJ45 outlet, 8-position 8-conductor (8/8), screw terminals, with antibacterial treatment, white

43,1 32,6

TV-RD-SAT, 5-2400 MHz coaxial socket outlet 14300.AB.01 Coaxial TV-RD-SAT 5-2400 MHz socket outlet, single connection, with male connector, connection attenuation 1 dB, with antibacterial treatment, white. Allows the passage of d.c. current and control signals (24 V 500 mA max)

32,1 22,6

14300.AB.01

The drawings of the side views give the overall dimensions and the flush depth in mm

173

CALL-WAY

14342.AB

CALL-WAY Antibacterial Plana devices 2- and 3-module cover plates 14642.AB.01 2-module cover plate, technopolymer, antibacterial treatment, white 14653.AB.01 3-module cover plate, technopolymer, antibacterial treatment, white

14642.AB.01

14653.AB.01

4- and 7-module cover plates 14654.AB.01 4-module cover plate, technopolymer, antibacterial treatment, white 14657.AB.01 7-module cover plate, technopolymer, antibacterial treatment, white

14654.AB.01

14657.AB.01

174

CALL-WAY Antibacterial Plana devices 4 (2+2)-module cover plates (71 mm distance between centre) 14643.AB.01 4-module cover plate (2+2, 71 mm distance between centre), technopolymer, antibacterial treatment, white

14643.AB.01

6 (2+2+2)-module cover plates (71 mm distance between centre)

CALL-WAY

14644.AB.01 6-module cover plate (2+2+2, 71 mm distance between centre), technopolymer, antibacterial treatment, white

14644.AB.01

8 (2+2+2+2)-module cover plates (71 mm distance between centre) 14669.AB.01 8-module cover plate (2+2+2+2, 71 mm distance between centre), technopolymer, antibacterial treatment, white

14669.AB.01

175

CALL-WAY Installation examples Call indicator The figure shows an example of a floor plan showing the system's arrangement in a health care facility that needs to have a call system (signalling only) to display: - the call, type of call, and its origin (room number, bed, etc.); - the presence in the room of the healthcare personnel following up on the call; - calls that could come from other rooms. The operating mode is VDE-0834, signalling the type of call priority and in which room it is made via the landing lamps and the combinations of the lights that come on. For more detailed information, such as the bed number, a 02081.AB or a 02097 is required.

Note. The 02096 is configured only via dedicated software, the inputs and outputs are independent of each other, the only limit is that they must belong to the same ward. It does not work in on-line mode.

•

14501.AB

The Bus will be composed of two different types of cables: - 1 pair for the power supply (cable 2x2.5 mm); - 1 pair for data transmission (FTP cat. 5e cable)

02084

14503.AB

02097

•

• •

•

• 14504.AB

176

02096

CALL-WAY Installation examples Connection diagram

LEGEND: A - 2x2.5 mm2 (power supply) B - 1 cp FTP- Cat. 5e (data) 02090 - Power supply unit 02094 - Line coupler

02097 or PC

Room 3

Room 4

14501.AB

14503.AB

14504.AB

02084

14504.AB

02097 or PC

Room 2

02096

02084

14504.AB

02096

02084 CALL-WAY INSTALLATION EXAMPLES

Room 1

02094 B

Secondary backbone

230 V~ 02090

14501.AB 14503.AB

02094

Secondary backbone

230 V~

02090

14503.AB

02096

14503.AB

14504.AB

02084

14387.B

02094

Secondary backbone

14387.R

02090

230 V~

Room 5

Shared bathroom

Note: In the case of multi-backbone installation then, with multiple ADL-EF, channel 2 of the ADL-EF (via the Lantronix configurer, at the link: www.lantronix.com/support/ downloads/?p=DEVICEINSTALLER) must be configured as default: with UDP protocol, the same remote port for all the devices, broadcast flag ticked and local host 0.0.0.0.

177

CALL-WAY Installation examples Call indicator

The Bus will be composed of two different types of cables: - 1 pair for the power supply (cable 2x2.5 mm); - 1 pair for data transmission (FTP cat.5e cable)

The figure shows an example of a floor plan showing the system's arrangement in a health care facility that needs to have a call system (signalling only) to display: - the call, type of call, and its origin (room number, bed, etc.); - the presence in the room of the healthcare personnel following up on the call; - calls that could come from other rooms. The operating mode is VDE-0834, which includes the possibility of distinguishing the call priorities (normal, assistance, emergency). Without the 02097 or a PC with dedicated software, the network does not have an events log or the ability to merge wards automatically.

Note. When setting up it is always wise to have another 2 pairs of FTP cables because if in the future there were a need to expand the system, integrating voice transmission too, it would be enough to add the voice unit module 02082.AB to each display module 02081.AB thus taking action only on the configuration. The display module with the addition of the voice unit module basically becomes like a communication terminal 02080.AB.

02084

14503.AB

02097

•

• •

•

• 14504.AB

•

• 02081.AB

02989.AB

178

14342.AB

CALL-WAY Installation examples Connection diagram

LEGEND: A - 2x2.5 mm2 (power supply) B - 1 cp FTP- Cat. 5e (data) 02090 - Power supply unit 02094 - Line coupler

02089.AB

14342.AB

14342.AB 4

02084

14342.AB

14504.AB

02084

14503.AB Room 1

14342.AB

14504.AB

02084

14503.AB

14504.AB

14503.AB

Room 2

02081.AB

02097 or PC

14342.AB

Room 3

02081.AB

CALL-WAY INSTALLATION EXAMPLES

02097 or PC

02089.AB

02094 B

Secondary backbone

230 V~ 02090 Room N

02094 02095

02081.AB

02084

230 V~

02090

Secondary backbone

14504.AB

02094

14342.AB Secondary backbone

02089.AB Paging system

02090

14503.AB 14342.AB

230 V~

02089.AB Note: In the case of multi-backbone installation then, with multiple ADL-EF, channel 2 of the ADL-EF (via the Lantronix configurer, at the link: www.lantronix.com/support/ downloads/?p=DEVICEINSTALLER) must be configured as default: with UDP protocol, the same remote port for all the devices, broadcast flag ticked and local host 0.0.0.0.

179

CALL-WAY Installation examples Voice communication Call-way can be integrated with other systems that support the ESPA 4.4.4 protocol (pagers/DECT). The Bus will be composed of two different types of cables: - 1 pair for the power supply (cable 2x2.5mm2); - 3 pairs for data, voice and announcements/music channel transmission respectively (FTP cat. 5e cable). Alternatively a single SSTP cable can be used.

In the layout illustrating the system setup in a healthcare facility, there is the need to have a call system that also allows voice communication; the room device that is used is the communication terminal 02080.AB. The device's display will show: - the call, type of call, and its origin (room number, bed, etc.); - the presence in the room of the healthcare personnel following up on the call; - calls that could come from other rooms. The voice unit part of the device will enable: - hands-free communication between two parties (patient nurse, nurse - nurse, nurse - physician) with the two modes "hands free" and "push to talk"; - transmitting a music channel (which will be promptly discontinued in the event of a call or announcement); - making room, ward or general announcements (via the telephone coupler connected to the system); - communication with fixed telephones (via PABX switchboard) or normal DECT;

Note. For only hands-free communication between two communication terminals only the ADL-EF is needed: 02094.

02084

14503.AB

02097

•

• •

•

• 14504.AB

•

02080.AB 02989.AB

180

14342.AB

CALL-WAY Installation examples Connection diagram LEGEND: A - 2x2.5 mm2 (power supply) B - 1 cp FTP-Cat. 5e (data) C - 2 cp FTP-Cat. 5e (voice/music) 02090 - Power supply unit 02094 - Line coupler

02089.AB

Cables B and C can be grouped in a single SSTP cable (Cat.6 4 twisted pairs individually shielded)

02089.AB

14342.AB

14342.AB 4

02084

02097 or PC

02089.AB

14342.AB

14504.AB

02084

14342.AB

14504.AB

02084

14503.AB

Room 1

14504.AB

14503.AB

Room 2

Room 3

02097 or PC

02094

C A

C Secondary backbone

02080.AB CALL-WAY INSTALLATION EXAMPLES

02080.AB

230 V~ 02090 02078 02094

Room N

02080.AB Secondary backbone

230 V~

02090 02094

DECT system

Secondary backbone

02090

Phone extensions

PABX

02084

14504.AB

14342.AB

02089.AB

14503.AB 14342.AB

230 V~

181

The system for networking the entire facility. Communicating, transferring and sharing data, images and videos of any size needs secure and fast connections. The Netsafe structured cabling system connects all the work environments in a facility. The system consists of a very wide range of tools: versatile solutions that are easy to install and feature great performance, for copper and fibre optic networks, they provide an extensive range of action.

RJ45 AND TELEPHONE SOCKET OUTLETS. Cat. 5, 6 and 6A connections for different types of UTP and FTP wiring.

182

CABLES AND CORDS. Enable 360° connection: 4-pair twisted cables, fibre optic, with PVC or LSZH outer jacket and patch cords for high-performance transmission.

PATCH PANELS. Rack units complete with RJ45 connectors for horizontal distribution or terminations of devices in enclosures and cabinets.

ENCLOSURES AND CABINETS. Metalwork ideal for housing patch panels and power panels in local area networks (LAN), from 6 to 42 rack units.

183

NETSAFE

Catalogue section

184

SELECTION GUIDE

from page 186

GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS

from page 188

RJ45 SOCKETS

from page 190

CABLES AND CONNECTORS

from page 200

PATCH PANELS

from page 204

CABLES AND CORDS

from page 206

ENCLOSURES AND CABINETS

from page 212

10” S.O.H.O. SYSTEM

from page 220

POWER PANELS

from page 222

NETSAFE

185

NETSAFE Selection guide RJ45 sockets

Series Eikon grey

Arké

white

grey

Category

Cat. 5e UTP Cat. 6 UTP Cat. 6 FTP Cat. 6A FTP Cat. 5e UTP Cat. 5e FTP Cat. 6 UTP

20338.8

20338.8.B

20339.11

20339.11.B 20339.11.N

20338.8.N 19339.11

19339.11.B

20339.13

20339.13.B 20339.13.N

19339.13

20339.14

20339.14.B 20339.14.N

19339.14

20339.16

20339.16.B 20339.16.N

19339.16

Plana white

white

8000 Silver

ivory

16358.8

16358.8.B

14338.8

14338.8.SL

08458.8

16359.11

16359.11.B

14339.11

14339.11.SL

08459.11

19339.13.B

14339.13

14339.13.SL

19339.14.B

14339.14

14339.14.SL

19339.16.B

14339.16

14339.16.SL

110 compatible wiring 20339.4

20339.4.B

20339.4.N

16359.4

16359.4.B

14339.4

14339.4.SL

08459.4

20339.5

20339.5.B

20339.5.N

16359.5

16359.5.B

14339.5

14339.5.SL

08459.5

20339.6

20339.6.B

20339.6.N

16359.6

16359.6.B

14339.6

14339.6.SL

08459.6

RJ45 connectors

Code

Category

03009.14

grey

Wiring without using tools

Category

20338.8

Idea white

Wiring without using tools

Cat. 5e UTP Cat. 5e FTP Cat. 6 UTP Cat. 6 FTP Cat. 6A FTP

110 compatible wiring

03009.11 03009.5 03009.13 03009.14 03009.16

Patch module for DIN rail (60715 TH35) Category

Code

Cat. 6 UTP

03002.13

Cables and connectors Copper cables

Code

Category

Cat. 5e U/UTP 03086

03050

Fibre optic cables 03150.1

Cat. 5e F/UTP Cat. 6 U/UTP Cat. 6 F/UTP Cat. 6A S/FTP 4 8

03050

LSZH

03051

PVC

03060

LSZH

03061

LSZH

03071 03076

LSZH

03086

LSZH

03150.1

03150.2

LSZH

03151.1

03151.2

50/125 µm

03105.SC

03106.SC

03106.ST

20 cm

Cat. 5e F/UTP Cat. 6 U/UTP

03019.02

50 cm

03017.05

03017.1

03017.2

03017.3

03017.5

03018.1

03018.2

03018.3

03018.5

03019.1

03019.2

03019.3

03019.5

Cat. 6 S/FTP

03020.1

03020.2

03020.3

03020.5

Cat. 6A S/FTP

03022.1

03022.3

03022.5

03022.2

Category

62.5/125 µm

50/125 µm

03110.SC

03111.SC

LC 03110.SC

186

2000 m

LSZH

Cat. 5e U/UTP

Fibre optic

1000 m 03050.B

Code Category

03020.1

500 m

62.5/125 µm

ST SC

Patch cords Copper

305 m

PVC

Number of fibres

Fibre optic connectors Category

03105.SC

Jacket

SC and LC

03111.LC 03111.SC.LC UTP - U/UTP (Unscreened / Unscreened Twisted Pair): connectors and cables of Cat. 5e and Cat. 6 unshielded; FTP - F/UTP (Foil screened / Unscreened Twisted Pair): connectors and cables of Cat. 5e and Cat. 6 shielded; FTP - S/FTP (Braid screened / Foil screened Twisted Pair): connectors and cables of Cat. 6A shielded.

NETSAFE Selection guide Surface mounting enclosures and cabinets

Enclosures Rack units

For 10” S.O.H.O. panels

6 8

03308

03224.3

Cabinets For 19” panels

For 19” panels

03206.3 03308

03209.3

03212.3

03215.3

03224.3

03242.3 - 03243.3 - 03245.3

Complements Copper

Category

10” patch panels

19” patch panels

Cat. 3 Cat. 5e UTP

03024.3 03303.1

03024.4

Cat. 5e FTP

03024.5

Cat. 6 UTP

03024.5 03303.3

03024.6

Cat. 6 FTP

03024.7

Cat. 6A FTP 03124.ST.E

Blank Fibre optic

03101.LC

03024.9 03303.E

03024.E

Category

19” fibre optic trays

03124.ST.E

03124.SC.E

Category

03301.1A

Optical adaptors for fibre optic trays

03101.ST

03101.SC

LC Panels

Rack units 1

03101.LC 10” cable outlet panels

19” cable outlet panels

03301.1A

03200.1A (open cable outlet) 03200.1U

03201.2U

2 Rack units 1 03204.2U

03200.2U 10” blind panels

19” blind panels

03301.1U

03201.1U

03201.2U

03201.3U

Rack units

19” fixed and removable shelf

2 03302.1U

03204.1U - 03204.2U

Telescopic rails Rack units 1

03204.1UM 10” mounting frames

19” mounting frames

03302.1U

03202.2U - 03203.2U

Rack units 03261

19” power panels

03260 - 03261 - 03262

Accessories Fan 230 V~ 03256 Set of cable guide rings 03251 Lock 03256

Handle with keys

03258.3

03259.3 Metal screw and nut 03257

03258.3

03212.3P

Spare doors

03206.3P

03209.3P

03212.3P

03215.3P

03224.3P

03242.3P - 03245.3P

Rack units

03209.3L

Hinged opening kit

03209.3L

03212.3L

03215.3L

Number of wheels 03245.3R

NETSAFE

Rack units

Set of wheels

03224.3R

03245.3R

187

NETSAFE General characteristics The products developed enable making networks in Cat. 5e and Cat. 6 shielded or unshielded and Cat. 6A shielded that remain stable over the years and deliver high performance. The availability of RJ45 connectors that are self-crimping or that can be wired using tools, 4-pair copper cables, fibre optic products, loaded and unloaded patch panels, surface mounting cabinets and enclosures with from 6 to 42 rack units and accessories enable making different types of structured cabling to satisfy any installation requirement, from the small office of a freelancer to buildings for commercial or residential use. With Netsafe, Vimar not only provides a set of products and accessories, but also services (training, support) that accompany the user and the installer over time, from the first approach to

Aesthetic coordination Netsafe is not a closed-loop system, but is both technically and aesthetically integrated with the traditional electrical system, allowing great installation versatility (flush, wall, floor and underfloor installation). RJ45 connector sockets are available for installation on mounting frames in the Eikon, Arké, Idea, Plana and 8000 series, mak-

the long term, with a warranty period of 3 years after installation. It is indisputable that high quality products are required in order to make high performance structured cabling, but in this sector the characteristics and quality of the installation itself make a difference too. This is why it is important to have the knowledge and skills that Vimar provides in the form of training courses taught by qualified industry instructors that allow electrical installers to become familiar with structured cabling in order to then "market" themselves with top-quality training to take advantage of the potential of such a sophisticated product.

ing it possible to create computer user points that are perfectly coordinated with the electrical system present in the room. Here can also be included socket outlets for dedicated lines and the materials for making system terminations, including the vast selection of cover plate colours, shapes and materials.

Eikon - RJ45 connector sockets Cat. 6 (20339.6.N) with Eikon Evo, Eikon Chrome and Eikon Total Look cover plate.

Arké - RJ45 connector sockets Cat. 6 (19339.6) with Round cover plate in Reflex Plus.

188

Idea - RJ45 connector sockets Cat. 5e (16359.4) with Rondò cover plate in die-cast metal.

Plana - RJ45 connector sockets Cat. 5e (14338.8.SL) with metal cover plate.

NETSAFE General characteristics Copper horizontal cabling The copper horizontal cabling is the connection between the distribution cabinet and the work stations. Listed below are some simple but essential rules for successful implementation.

Figure 1 - Star architecture

Topology The topology (network architecture) must be a star: all the devices are connected to a single control unit (fig. 1). Each RJ45 socket located near a workstation must match a similar one in the patch panel in (installed inside the distribution cabinet); the sockets are connected together by means of a 4-pair twisted cable with jacket. Any installed socket outlet can be used either as a phone or data socket outlet.

Distances The standards prescribe at most 100 m between the active equipment in the distribution cabinet and the user equipment. The recommended maximum distance between the socket outlet installed in the distribution cabinet and the similar one near the workstation is 90 m; the maximum total length for the patch cords and the connection to the user equipment is 10 m. It is advisable to limit the distance between two consecutive junction boxes to 30 m; use a wide radius of curvature on the raceways, to avoid damaging the cables; do not pull on cables with too much force when laying them.

Cable The only permissible cable is the twisted pair with 4 pairs twisted and braided two by two, copper mono-conductor with typical cross-section that may vary, depending on the category, from 24 AWG to 23 AWG (American Wire Gauge: a unit of measurement that corresponds to 24 AWG = 0.21 mm2 and 23 AWG = 0.26 mm2). The insulation of the pairs is made of polyethylene, that of the outer jacket of PVC. There are cables with an outer coating called LSZH (Low Smoke Zero Halogen), made with materials that do not contain halogens and that, in case of combustion, have very low smoke emissions. In particular installations, this type of cable is required by fire safety regulations.

Socket connector Each workstation must have access to at least two RJ45 sockets, placed every 7/8 m2.

Warranty on Netsafe systems All Netsafe products are guaranteed for 3 years. In the event of operating trouble in the warranty period, once the installer has checked which of the original components is to blame for the malfunctioning, Vimar will replace the defective component free of charge. The reference wholesaler will replace any defective components upon authorization by VIMAR.

Structured cabling: regulations

NETSAFE

All the components of a structured cabling system must comply with the regulatory standards that define the minimum specifications to ensure constant quality and performance over time. The job of standardizing telecommunications systems in buildings has been developed beginning in 1985 in the United States by the EIA (Electronic Industries Association) and TIA (Telecommunications Industries Association), upon request by the CCIA (computer manufacturer's association).

Conformity to Standards ANSI/TIA/EIA 568 C, ISO/IEC 11801, CEI EN 50173.

189

NETSAFE RJ45 sockets Cat. 5e RJ45 sockets Cat. 5e UTP for workstations

RJ45 socket Cat. 5e UTP - Colour coding

Field of application Creation of workstations aesthetically coordinated with the electrical system present in the room. Devices can be installed using the corresponding mounting frames and cover plates, in the same way as for the other devices in the series: • Eikon series: 20338.8; • Arké series: 19338.9; • Idea series: 16358.8; • Plana series: 14338.8; • 8000 series: 08458.8.

Supported applications • Gigabit Ethernet (1000BASE-T); • Fast Ethernet (100BASE-TX); • Ethernet (10BASE-T); • 25/52/155 Mbps ATM; • 4/16/100 Mbps Token Ring; • all the other supported applications for category 5, 5e or class D.

Conformity to Standards Standards ANSIA/TIA/EIA 568 C, ISO/IEC 11801, CEI EN 50173.

20338.8, 16358.8, 14338.8, 08458.8 Technical specifications • Performance in Cat. 5e; • cover for terminating conductors with: - colour coding to reduce the risk of incorrect connection; - snap closing that ensures completely locking the conductors and prevents sliding and potential deformation.

190

RJ45 socket Cat. 5e UTP - Assembly

NETSAFE RJ45 sockets Cat. 5e RJ45 socket Cat. 5e UTP RJ45 socket with Netsafe connector Cat. 5e, unshielded, T568A/B universal wiring, 8 contacts, insulation-piercing terminals without using tools

EIKON

33,1 23,6

20338.8 grey

20338.8.B white

20338.8.N Next

IDEA

33,5

16358.8 grey

PLANA

35,2 24,2

22,3

24,8

22,6

23,6

16358.8.B white

8000

33,1

22,3

14338.8.SL Silver

08458.8 ivory

NETSAFE

14338.8 white

The drawings of the side views give the overall dimensions and the flush depth in mm Cables, from p. 200 - Patch panels, from p. 204

191

NETSAFE RJ45 sockets Cat. 5e RJ45 sockets Cat. 5e UTP for workstations Field of application Creation of workstations aesthetically coordinated with the electrical system present in the room. Devices can be installed using the corresponding mounting frames and cover plates, in the same way as for the other devices in the series: • Eikon series: 20339.4, 20339.11; • Arké series: 19339.11; • Idea series: 16359.4, 16359.11; • Plana series: 14339.4, 14339.11; • 8000 series: 08459.11.

RJ45 socket Cat. 5e UTP - Colour coding T568A 3a

T568A 1 2

B A

2 1

4 5 B A

B A

2 1 8 7

B A

4 5 6 3

B A

2 18 7

B A

6 3

4 56 3

B A

8 7

Standards ANSIA/TIA/EIA 568 C, ISO/IEC 11801, CEI EN 50173.

20339.4, 16359.4, 14339.4 Technical specifications

RJ45 socket Cat. 5e UTP - Assembly B A

• Performance in Cat. 5e; • termination of 110 compatible conductors using tool 03250.

B A B A

20339.11, 19339.11, 16359.11, 14339.11, 08459.11 Technical specifications • Performance in Cat. 5e; • cover for terminating conductors with: - colour coding to reduce the risk of incorrect connection; - snap closing that ensures completely locking the conductors and prevents sliding and potential deformation.

T. 5

192

T. 5

T568B 1 2

Supported applications

Conformity to Standards

RJ45 socket Cat. 5e UTP - Wiring

• Gigabit Ethernet (1000BASE-T); • Fast Ethernet (100BASE-TX); • Ethernet (10BASE-T); • 25/52/155 Mbps ATM; • 4/16/100 Mbps Token Ring; • all the other supported applications for category 5, 5e or class D.

T568B 1 2

T568A 1

T568B

8 4a

8 8

NETSAFE RJ45 sockets Cat. 5e RJ45 socket Cat. 5e UTP RJ45 socket with Netsafe connector Cat. 5e, unshielded, T568A/B universal wiring, 8 contacts, insulation-piercing terminals 110 compatible

EIKON

33,8 24

20339.4 grey

20339.4.B white

22,3

20339.4.N Next

IDEA

34,1 24,1

16359.4 grey

16359.4.B white

PLANA

34,2 23,7

14339.4 white

22,3

14339.4.SL Silver

RJ45 socket Cat. 5e UTP RJ45 socket with Netsafe connector Cat. 5e, unshielded, T568A/B universal wiring, 8 contacts, insulation-piercing terminals without using tools

EIKON

39,8 30,3

20339.11 grey

ARKÉ

20339.11.N Next

IDEA

39,7

22,3

30,1

29,8

20339.11.B white

19339.11.B white

PLANA

16359.11 grey

39,8

8000

40,7 30,1

22,3

29,3

16359.11.B white

NETSAFE

19339.11 grey

14339.11 white

14339.11.SL Silver

The drawings of the side views give the overall dimensions and the flush depth in mm Cables, from p. 200 - Patch panels, from p. 204

08459.11 ivory

193

NETSAFE RJ45 sockets Cat. 5e RJ45 sockets Cat. 5e FTP for workstations

RJ45 socket Cat. 5e FTP - Wiring

Field of application Creation of workstations aesthetically coordinated with the electrical system present in the room. Devices can be installed using the corresponding mounting frames and cover plates, in the same way as for the other devices in the series: • Eikon series: 20339.5; • Idea series: 16359.5; • Plana series: 14339.5; • 8000 series: 08459.5.

T-568A

Supported applications

T-568B

Technical specifications • Performance in Cat. 5e; • termination of 110 compatible conductors using tool 03250.

Conformity to Standards Standards ANSIA/TIA/EIA 568 C, ISO/IEC 11801, CEI EN 50173.

RJ45 socket Cat. 5e FTP - Assembly 3

03250 2 1

A 2

A 1 2

194

NETSAFE RJ45 sockets Cat. 5e RJ45 socket Cat. 5e FTP RJ45 socket with Netsafe connector Cat. 5e, shielded, T568A/B universal wiring, 8 contacts, insulation-piercing terminals 110 compatible

EIKON

45,65 36,15

20339.5 grey

20339.5.B white

22,3

20339.5.N Next

IDEA

46 36

16359.5 grey

PLANA

16359.5.B white

8000

47,1 36,1

22,3

24,8

36,5

24,8

14339.5.SL Silver

08459.5 ivory

NETSAFE

14339.5 white

The drawings of the side views give the overall dimensions and the flush depth in mm Cables, from p. 200 - Patch panels, from p. 204

195

NETSAFE RJ45 sockets Cat. 6 RJ45 sockets Cat. 6 UTP for workstations Field of application Creation of workstations aesthetically coordinated with the electrical system present in the room. Devices can be installed using the corresponding mounting frames and cover plates, in the same way as for the other devices in the series: • Eikon series: 20339.6, 20339.13; • Arké series: 19339.13; • Idea series: 16359.6; • Plana series: 14339.6, 14339.13, 14339.AB.13; • 8000 series: 08459.6.

RJ45 socket Cat. 6 UTP - Colour coding T568A 3a

T568A 1 2

Technical specifications

B A

2 1

B A B A

4 5

B A

2 1 8 7

4 5 6 3

B A

RJ45 socket Cat. 6 UTP - Assembly B A

• Performance in Cat. 6 with additional margin that enables supporting Gigabit applications; • termination of 110 compatible conductors using tool 03250.

6 3

20339.6, 16359.6, 14339.6, 08459.6

8 7

8 7 2 1 6 3 4 5

Standards ANSIA/TIA/EIA 568 C, ISO/IEC 11801, CEI EN 50173.

B A B A

20339.13, 19339.13, 14339.13 Technical specifications • Performance in Cat. 6 with additional margin that enables supporting Gigabit applications; • cover for terminating conductors with: - colour coding to reduce the risk of incorrect connection; - snap closing that ensures completely locking the conductors and prevents sliding and potential deformation.

196

T. 5

T568B 1 2

Supported applications

Conformity to Standards

RJ45 socket Cat. 6 UTP - Wiring

T568B 1 2

8 4a

T568A 1

T568B

8 4a

8 8

NETSAFE RJ45 sockets Cat. 6 RJ45 socket Netsafe Cat. 6 UTP RJ45 socket with Netsafe connector Cat. 6, unshielded, T568A/B universal wiring, 8 contacts, insulation-piercing terminals 110 compatible

EIKON

33,8 24

20339.6 grey

20339.6.B white

22,3

20339.6.N Next

IDEA

34,1 24,1

16359.6 grey

PLANA

35,1

22,3

24,1

24,8

16359.6.B white

8000

34,2

14339.6 white

14339.6.SL Silver

08459.6 ivory

RJ45 socket Netsafe Cat. 6 UTP RJ45 socket with Netsafe connector Cat. 6, unshielded, T568A/B universal wiring, 8 contacts, insulation-piercing terminals without using tools 39,8

EIKON

30,3

20339.13 grey

20339.13.B white

20339.13.N Next

ARKÉ

40 29,8

19339.13.B white

PLANA

NETSAFE

19339.13 grey

39,8 29,3

14339.13 14339.AB.13 white The drawings of the side views give the overall dimensions and the flush depth in mm Cables, from p. 200 - Patch panels, from p. 204

14339.13.SL Silver

197

NETSAFE RJ45 sockets Cat. 6 and Cat. 6A

Supported applications

T568A 1 2

T568A

RJ45 socket Cat. 6 FTP - Wiring

2 1

B A

6 3

4 5

B A

8 7

4 5

2 1 B A

B A

6 3

8 7

Conformity to Standards B A

6 3

2 1 B A

8 7

4 5

Standards ANSIA/TIA/EIA 568 C, ISO/IEC 11801, CEI EN 50173.

B A

RJ45 sockets Cat. 6A FTP for workstations

RJ45 socket Cat. 6A FTP - Assembly B A

Field of application

B A

Creation of workstations aesthetically coordinated with the electrical system present in the room. Devices can be installed using the corresponding mounting frames and cover plates, in the same way as for the other devices in the series: • Eikon series: 20339.16; • Arké series: 19339.16; • Plana series: 14339.16.

T. 5

Supported applications • 10 Gigabit Ethernet (10GBASE-T); • Gigabit Ethernet (1000BASE-T); • Fast Ethernet (100BASE-TX); • Ethernet (10BASE-T); • 25/52/155 Mbps ATM; • 4/16/100 Mbps Token Ring; • all the supported applications for category 6A or class EA.

Technical specifications • Performance in Cat. 6A; • cover for terminating conductors with: - colour coding to reduce the risk of incorrect connection; - snap closing that ensures completely locking the conductors and prevents sliding and potential deformation.

Conformity to Standards Standards ANSIA/TIA/EIA 568 C, ISO/IEC 11801, CEI EN 50173.

198

8 4a

Technical specifications • Performance in Cat. 6; • cover for terminating conductors with: - colour coding to reduce the risk of incorrect connection; - snap closing that ensures completely locking the conductors and prevents sliding and potential deformation.

T568B

T568B 1 2

8 4a

T568B

T568A

Creation of workstations aesthetically coordinated with the electrical system present in the room. Devices can be installed using the corresponding mounting frames and cover plates, in the same way as for the other devices in the series: • Eikon series: 20339.14; • Arké series: 19339.14; • Plana series: 14339.14, 14339.AB.14.

Field of application

RJ45 socket Cat. 6 FTP - Colour coding

RJ45 sockets Cat. 6 FTP for workstations

NETSAFE RJ45 sockets Cat. 6 and Cat. 6A RJ45 socket Netsafe Cat. 6 FTP RJ45 socket with Netsafe connector Cat. 6, shielded, T568A/B universal wiring, 8 contacts, insulation-piercing terminals without using tools

EIKON

39,8

30,3

20339.14 grey

20339.14.B white

20339.14.N Next

ARKÉ

29,8

19339.14 grey

19339.14.B white

PLANA

39,8

29,3

14339.14 14339.AB.14 white

14339.14.SL Silver

RJ45 socket Netsafe Cat. 6A FTP RJ45 socket with Netsafe connector Cat. 6A, shielded, T568A/B universal wiring, 8 contacts, insulation-piercing terminals without using tools

EIKON

39,8

30,3

20339.16 grey

20339.16.B white

20339.16.N Next

ARKÉ

40 29,8

19339.16.B white

PLANA

NETSAFE

19339.16 grey

39,8 29,3

14339.16 white The drawings of the side views give the overall dimensions and the flush depth in mm Cables, from p. 200 - Patch panels, from p. 204

14339.16.SL Silver

199

NETSAFE Copper cables Copper cables Field of application

Horizontal sections of local area networks (LAN).

Main applications

• 10 Gigabit Ethernet (10GBASE-T); only for 03086; • Gigabit Ethernet (1000BASE-T); • Fast Ethernet (100BASE-TX); • Ethernet (10BASE-T); • 25/52/155 Mbps ATM; • 4/16/100 Mbps Token Ring.

03050, 03051, 03060 and 03061 - Cat. 5e U/UTP and F/UTP Supported applications

All the applications for category 5, 5e or class D.

Technical specifications

• Conductors: 24 AWG (ø 0.512 mm) solid copper; • nominal outside diameter: ø 4.9 mm (U/UTP), ø 5.1 mm (F/UTP); • min. bending radius: 8 x nominal outside diameter; • weight: 3 kg/100 m (F/UTP), 4 kg/100 m (F/UTP); • insulation: HDPE; • inside of the cable: 4 twisted pairs, unshielded (U/UTP), shielded with aluminium/PET foil (F/UTP); • coating: PVC or LSZH; • metric cable length indication on the jacket; • nominal spread rate: 70%; • maximum traction force: 10 kg.

03071 and 03076 - Cat. 6 U/UTP, F/UTP Supported applications

All the applications for category 6 or class E.

Technical specifications

• Conductors: 23 AWG (ø 0.551 mm) solid copper; • nominal outside diam.: ø 5.9 mm (U/UTP), ø 7.4 mm (F/UTP); • min. bending radius: 8 x nominal outside diameter; • weight: 4 kg/100 m (U/UTP), 5.3 kg/100 m (F/UTP); • insulation: HDPE; • inside of the cable: 4 twisted pairs, unshielded (U/UTP), shielded with aluminium/PET foil (F/UTP); • coating: LSZH; • metric cable length indication on the jacket; • nominal spread rate: 70%; • maximum traction force: 10 kg.

03086 - Cat. 6A S/FTP Supported applications

All the applications for category 6A or class EA.

Technical specifications

• Conductors: 23 AWG (ø 0.555 mm) solid copper; • nominal outside diam.: ø 7.3 mm; • min. bending radius: 8 x nominal outside diameter; • weight: 5.4 kg/100 m; • insulation: Foam PE; • inside of the cable: 4 twisted pairs, shielded with Aluminium/ PET foil; • coating: LSZH; • metric cable length indication on the jacket; • nominal spread rate: 80%; • maximum traction force: 10 kg.

200

Electrical characteristics of cables Cat. 5e U/UTP at 20°C Freq. (MHz) 1 4 8 10 16 20 25 31.25 62.5 100

Attenuation (dB/100m) 2.0 4.1 5.8 6.5 8.2 9.3 10.4 11.7 17.0 22.0

RL (min. dB at 20°C) 20.0 23.0 24.5 25.0 25.0 25.0 24.3 23.6 21.5 20.1

NEXT (min. dB)

PS-NEXT (min. dB)

65.3 56.3 51.8 50.3 47.2 45.8 44.3 42.9 38.4 35.3

62.3 53.3 48.8 47.3 44.2 42.8 41.3 39.9 35.4 32.3

ELFEXT PS-ELFEXT (min. dB) (min. dB) 63.8 51.8 45.7 43.8 39.7 37.8 35.8 33.9 27.9 23.8

60.8 48.8 42.7 40.8 36.7 34.8 32.8 30.9 24.9 20.8

Prop. Delay (max ns) 570 552 547 545 543 542 541 540 539 538

Electrical characteristics of cables Cat. 5e F/UTP at 20°C Freq. (MHz) 1 4 8 10 16 20 25 31.25 62.5 100

Attenuation (dB/100m) 2.1 4.1 5.8 6.5 8.3 9.3 10.4 11.7 17.0 22.0

RL (min. dB at 20°C) 20.0 23.0 24.5 25.0 25.0 25.0 24.3 23.6 21.5 20.1

NEXT (min. dB)

PS-NEXT (min. dB)

65.3 56.3 51.8 50.3 47.2 45.8 44.3 42.9 38.4 35.3

62.3 53.3 48.8 47.3 44.2 42.8 41.3 39.9 35.4 32.3

ELFEXT PS-ELFEXT (min. dB) (min. dB) 64.0 52.0 45.9 44.0 39.9 38.0 36.0 34.1 28.1 24.0

61.0 49.0 42.9 41.0 36.9 35.0 33.0 31.1 25.1 21.0

Prop. Delay (max ns) 570 552 547 545 543 542 541 540 539 538

Electrical characteristics of cables Cat. 6 U/UTP at 20°C Freq. (MHz) 1 4 8 10 16 20 25 31.25 62.5 100 200 250

Attenuation (dB/100m) 2.0 3.8 5.3 6.0 7.6 8.5 9.5 10.7 15.4 19.8 29.0 32.8

RL (min. dB at 20°C) 20.0 23.0 24.5 25.0 25.0 25.0 24.3 23.6 21.5 20.1 18.0 17.3

NEXT (min. dB)

PS-NEXT (min. dB)

74.3 65.3 60.8 59.3 56.2 54.8 53.3 51.9 47.4 44.3 39.8 38.3

72.3 63.3 58.8 57.3 54.2 52.8 51.3 49.9 45.4 42.3 37.8 36.3

ELFEXT PS-ELFEXT (min. dB) (min. dB) 67.8 55.8 49.7 47.8 43.7 41.8 39.8 37.9 31.9 27.8 21.8 19.8

64.8 52.8 46.7 44.8 40.7 38.8 36.8 34.9 28.9 24.8 18.8 16.8

Prop. Delay (max ns) 570 552 547 545 543 542 541 540 539 538 537 536

Electrical characteristics of cables Cat. 6 F/UTP at 20°C Freq. (MHz) 1 4 8 10 16 20 25 31.25 62.5 100 200 250

Attenuation (dB/100m) 2.1 3.8 5.4 6.0 7.6 8.5 9.6 10.7 15.5 19.9 29.1 33.0

RL (min. dB at 20°C) 20.0 23.0 24.5 25.0 25.0 25.0 24.3 23.6 21.5 20.1 18.0 17.3

NEXT (min. dB)

PS-NEXT (min. dB)

75.3 66.3 61.8 60.3 57.2 55.8 54.3 52.9 48.4 45.3 40.8 39.3

72.3 63.3 58.8 57.3 54.2 52.8 51.3 49.9 45.4 42.3 37.8 36.3

ELFEXT PS-ELFEXT (min. dB) (min. dB) 68.0 56.0 49.9 48.0 43.9 42.0 40.0 38.1 32.1 28.0 22.0 20.0

65.0 53.0 50.4 45.0 40.9 39.0 45.4 35.1 29.1 25.0 19.0 17.0

Prop. Delay (max ns) 570 552 547 545 543 542 541 540 539 538 537 536

Electrical characteristics of cables Cat. 6A S/FTP at 20°C Freq. (MHz) 1 4 8 10 16 20 25 31.25 62.5 100 200 250 300 400 500

Attenuation (dB/100m) 2.1 3.8 5.3 5.9 7.5 8.4 9.4 10.5 15.0 19.1 27.6 31.1 34.3 40.1 45.3

RL (min. dB at 20°C) 20.0 23.0 24.5 25.0 25.0 25.0 24.3 23.6 21.5 20.1 18.0 17.3 16.8 15.9 15.2

NEXT (min. dB)

PS-NEXT (min. dB)

ELFEXT (min. dB)

PS-ELFEXT (min. dB)

75.0 66.3 61.8 60.3 57.2 55.8 54.3 52.9 48.4 45.3 40.8 39.3 38.1 36.3 34.8

72.3 63.3 58.8 57.3 54.2 52.8 51.3 49.9 45.4 42.3 37.8 36.3 35.1 33.3 31.8

68.0 56.0 49.9 48.0 43.9 42.0 40.0 38.1 32.1 28.0 22.0 20.0 18.5 16.0 14.0

65.0 53.0 46.9 45.0 40.9 39.0 37.0 35.1 29.1 25.0 19.0 17.0 15.5 13.0 11.0

Prop. Delay (max ns) 570 552 547 545 543 542 541 540 539 538 537 536 536 536 536

NETSAFE Copper cables Cables category 5e U/UTP 03050 03050.B 03051

Cable Cat. 5e, unshielded U/UTP, 4-pair, 24 AWG with PVC jacket, grey - 305 m As above - 1000 m Cable Cat. 5e, unshielded U/UTP, 4-pair, 24 AWG with LSZH jacket, grey - 305 m

03050 03050.B

03051

Cables category 5e F/UTP 03060 03061

Cable Cat. 5e, shielded F/UTP, 4-pair, 24 AWG with PVC jacket, grey - 305 m Cable Cat. 5e, shielded F/UTP, 4-pair, 24 AWG with LSZH jacket, grey - 305 m

03060

03061

Cables category 6 U/UTP 03071

Cable Cat. 6, unshielded U/UTP, 4-pair, 23 AWG with LSZH jacket, green - 305 m

03071

Cables category 6 F/UTP 03076

Cable Cat. 6, shielded F/UTP, 4-pair, 23 AWG with LSZH jacket, green - 500 m

03076

03086

NETSAFE

Cables category 6A S/FTP Cable Cat. 6A, shielded S/FTP, 4-pair, 23 AWG with LSZH jacket, orange - 500 m

03086

201

NETSAFE RJ45 connectors for copper cables RJ45 connectors for copper cables Field of application

03009.4, 03009.5, 03009.6 - Wiring

• Gigabit Ethernet (1000BASE-T); • Fast Ethernet (100BASE-TX); • Ethernet (10BASE-T); • 25/52/155 Mbps ATM; • 4/16/100 Mbps Token Ring.

03250 2

Technical specifications • cover for terminating conductors with: - colour coding to reduce the risk of incorrect connection; - snap closing that ensures completely locking the conductors and prevents sliding and potential deformation;

1 T568A 1

T568B

2a A

Conformity to Standards Standards ANSIA/TIA/EIA 568 C, ISO/IEC 11801, CEI EN 50173.

03009.5 and 03009.11 - Cat. 5e

03009.13, 03009.14, 03009.16 - Wiring

Supported applications All the supported applications for category 5, 5e or class D.

Technical specifications B

Performance in Cat. 5e with additional margin that enables supporting Gigabit applications.

03009.13 and 03009.14 - Cat. 6

B A

6 3

2 1 B A

8 7

Technical specifications

4 5

Supported applications All the supported applications for category 6 or class E. Performance in Cat. 6 with additional margin that enables supporting Gigabit applications.

03009.16 - Cat. 6A Supported applications B A

• 10 Gigabit Ethernet (10GBASE-T); • all the applications for category 6A or class EA.

Technical specifications Performance in Cat. 6A with additional margin that enables supporting Gigabit applications. 03002.13 - Patch module for DIN rail

03002.13 - Patch module for DIN rail Technical specifications Patch module for installation on DIN rail (60715 TH35) of Netsafe RJ45 connectors; • supplied with Netsafe Cat6 UTP connector, unshielded; • T568A/B universal wiring, 8 contacts, insulation-piercing terminals without using tools; • occupies 1 module size 17.5 mm.

Supported applications All the supported applications for category 6 or class E.

Conformity to Standards Standards ANSIA/TIA/EIA 568 C, ISO/IEC 11801, CEI EN 50173.

202

T. 5

4a A

NETSAFE RJ45 connectors for copper cables RJ45 connectors Cat. 5e for patch panels ∆ 03009.5

03009.11

RJ45 connector Cat. 5e, shielded, for patch panel 03024.E and 03303.E, T568A/B universal wiring, 8 contacts, insulation-piercing terminals 110 compatible RJ45 connector Cat. 5e, unshielded, for patch panel 03024.E and 03303.E, T568A/B universal wiring, 8 contacts, insulation-piercing terminals without using tools

∆ 03009.5

03009.11

RJ45 connectors Cat. 6 for patch panels 03009.13 03009.14

RJ45 connector Cat. 6, unshielded, for patch panel 03024.E and 03303.E, T568A/B universal wiring, 8 contacts, insulation-piercing terminals without using tools RJ45 connector Cat. 6, shielded, for patch panel 03024.E and 03303.E, T568A/B universal wiring, 8 contacts, insulation-piercing terminals without using tools

03009.13

03009.14

RJ45 connectors Cat. 6A for patch panels 03009.16

RJ45 connector Cat. 6A, shielded, for patch panel 03024.E and 03303.E, T568A/B universal wiring, 8 contacts, insulation-piercing terminals without using tools

03009.16

Patch module for DIN rail (60715 TH35) Permutation module for installation on DIN guide (60715 TH35) of Netsafe RJ45 connectors, occupying 1 x 17.5 mm module. Supplied with Netsafe Cat6 UTP connector, unshielded, T568A/B universal wiring, 8 contacts, insulation-piercing terminals without using tools NETSAFE

03002.13

03002.13 Surface mounting cabinets and enclosures, from page 212 - Accessories, page 216

∆ Available until stocks last

203

NETSAFE Patch panels • 24 shielded RJ45 connectors Cat. 6A, T568A/B universal wiring; • front panel ready for port identification; • cable holder (included) to simplify the wiring.

Horizontal distribution or termination of devices in surface mounting cabinets and enclosures for data transmission. The system made with shielded components can ensure greater protection against interference of an electromagnetic nature present in the room.

Supported applications • 10 Gigabit Ethernet (10GBASE-T); only for 03024.9; • Gigabit Ethernet (1000BASE-T); • Fast Ethernet (100BASE-TX); • Ethernet (10BASE-T); • 25/52/155 Mbps ATM; • 4/16/100 Mbps Token Ring.

44,4 mm 1 unità rack

03024.9 - Technical specifications

Field of application

03024.E

44,5 mm 1 unità rack

Patch panels

03024.3

482 mm - 19”

60 mm

Conformity to Standards Standards ANSIA/TIA/EIA 568 C, ISO/IEC 11801, CEI EN 50173.

03024.E - Technical specifications 480 mm - 19” 105 mm

44,5 mm 1 unità rack

• Ideal for 19” surface mounting cabinets and enclosures; • configurable to measure using RJ45 connectors 03008.9, 03009.5; • capacity to install up to 16 socket outlets;

03024.3 - Technical specifications • 50 RJ45 connectors Cat. 3, T568A/B universal wiring; • front panel ready for port identification; • insulation-piercing terminals 110 compatible.

480 mm - 19”

153 mm

44,5 mm 1 unità rack

03024.4 - Technical specifications • 24 unshielded RJ45 connectors Cat. 5e, T568A/B universal wiring; • front panel ready for port identification; • cable holder (included) to simplify the wiring; • insulation-piercing terminals 110 compatible.

03024.4

03024.5

480 mm - 19” 110 mm

• 24 shielded RJ45 connectors Cat. 5e shielded, T568 A/B universal wiring; • front panel ready for port identification; • cable holder (included) to simplify the wiring; • insulation-piercing terminals 110 compatible.

44,5 mm 1 unità rack

03024.5 - Technical specifications 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

03024.6

15 14 13 12 11 10

9 8 7 6

480 mm - 19”

5 4 3 2 1

153 mm

• 24 unshielded RJ45 connectors Cat. 6, T568A/B universal wiring; • front panel ready for port identification; • cable holder (included) to simplify the wiring; • insulation-piercing terminals 110 compatible.

44 mm 1 unità rack

03024.6 - Technical specifications 24 23 22 21 20

03024.7

19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10

9 8 7

482,6 mm - 19”

6 5 4 3 2 1

104,8 mm 24

• 24 shielded RJ45 connectors Cat. 6, T568A/B universal wiring; • front panel ready for port identification; • cable holder (included) to simplify the wiring; • dust flaps; • insulation-piercing terminals 110 compatible.

23 22 21 20 19 18

17 16 15

12 15

10 13

2 5 3 1

92,7 mm

204

24 22 20

482,6 mm - 19”

.6 A C AT

44 mm 1 unità rack

03024.7 - Technical specifications

03024.9

NETSAFE Patch panels Patch panel with empty ports 03024.E

19 in patch panel with 16 empty ports - 1 rack unit. To be completed with RJ45 connectors 03008.9 or 03009

03024.E

Patch panel Cat. 3, complete with RJ45 connectors for surface mounting cabinets and enclosures 03024.3

19” patch panel complete with 50 RJ45 connectors for telephony, insulation-piercing terminals 110 compatible - 1 rack unit

03024.3

Patch panel Cat. 5e, complete with RJ45 connectors for surface mounting cabinets and enclosures 03024.4 03024.5

19” patch panel complete with 24 RJ45 connectors Cat. 5e, unshielded, T568A/B universal wiring, 8 contacts, insulation-piercing terminals 110 compatible - 1 rack unit 19” patch panel complete with 24 RJ45 connectors Cat. 5e, shielded, T568A/B universal wiring, 8 contacts, insulation-piercing terminals 110 compatible - 1 rack unit

03024.4

03024.5

Patch panel Cat. 6, complete with RJ45 connectors for surface mounting cabinets and enclosures 03024.7

19” patch panel complete with 24 RJ45 connectors Cat. 6, unshielded, T568A/B universal wiring, 8 contacts, insulation-piercing terminals 110 compatible - 1 rack unit 19” patch panel complete with 24 RJ45 connectors Cat. 6, shielded, T568A/B universal wiring, 8 contacts, insulation-piercing terminals 110 compatible - 1 rack unit

03024.6

03024.7

Patch panel Cat. 6A, complete with RJ45 connectors for surface mounting cabinets and enclosures 03024.9

19” patch panel complete with 24 RJ45 connectors Cat. 6A, shielded, T568A/B universal wiring, 8 contacts, insulation-piercing terminals without using tools - 1 rack unit

03024.9

Surface mounting cabinets and enclosures, from page 212 - Accessories, page 216

205

NETSAFE

03024.6

NETSAFE Patch cords Patch cords Cat. 5e U/UTP, F/UTP in copper

Patch cords Cat. 6 S/FTP in copper

Field of application

Connection between the ports of the communication devices and a modular patch panel system.

Supported applications

Conformity to Standards

Standards ANSIA/TIA/EIA 568 C, ISO/IEC 11801, CEI EN 50173.

Conformity to Standards

Standards ANSIA/TIA/EIA 568 C, ISO/IEC 11801, CEI EN 50173.

Patch cords Cat. 6 U/UTP Field of application Connection between the ports of the communication devices and a modular patch panel system.

Supported applications

Patch cords Cat. 6A S/FTP in copper Field of application Connection between the ports of the communication devices and a modular patch panel system.

Supported applications

• 10 Gigabit Ethernet (10GBASE-T); • Gigabit Ethernet (1000BASE-T); • Fast Ethernet (100BASE-TX); • Ethernet (10BASE-T); • 25/52/155 Mbps ATM; • 4/16/100 Mbps Token Ring; • all the other supported applications for category 6A or class EA.

Conformity to Standards

Standards ANSIA/TIA/EIA 568 C, ISO/IEC 11801, CEI EN 50173.

206

NETSAFE Patch cords Patch cords Cat. 5e U/UTP in copper 03017.05 03017.1 03017.2 03017.3 03017.5

RJ45 patch cord Cat. 5e, unshielded U/UTP cable with 4 pairs 24 AWG, PVC jacket, grey - 0.5 m As above - 1 m As above - 2 m As above - 3 m As above - 5 m

03017.1

Patch cords Cat. 5e F/UTP in copper 03018.1 03018.2 03018.3 03018.5

RJ45 patch cord Cat. 5e, shielded F/UTP cable with 4 pairs 26 AWG, PVC jacket, white - 1 m As above - 2 m As above - 3 m As above - 5 m

03018.1

Patch cords Cat. 6 U/UTP in copper 03019.1 03019.2 03019.3 03019.5 03019.02

RJ45 patch cord Cat. 6, unshielded U/UTP cable with 4 pairs 24 AWG, PVC jacket, blue - 1 m As above - 2 m As above - 3 m As above - 5 m RJ45 flat patch cord Cat. 6, unshielded U/UTP with 4 pairs 30 AWG, PVC jacket, grey - 20 cm

03019.02

03019.1

Patch cords Cat. 6 S/FTP in copper 03020.1 03020.2 03020.3 03020.5

RJ45 patch cord Cat. 6, shielded S/FTP with 4 pairs 26 AWG, PVC jacket, blue - 1 m As above - 2 m As above - 3 m As above - 5 m

03020.1

03022.1 03022.2 03022.3 03022.5

NETSAFE

Patch cords Cat. 6A S/FTP in copper RJ45 patch cord Cat. 6A, shielded S/FTP with 4 pairs 26 AWG, PVC jacket, orange - 1 m As above - 2 m As above - 3 m As above - 5 m

03022.1

RJ45 connectors for patch panels, from page 202 - Patch panels, from page 204

207

NETSAFE Fibre-optic cables and patch cords Fibre-optic cables

Mechanical characteristics

Field of application

Number of fibres

Diameter mm2

Minimum installable radius of curvature (mm)

Weight (kg/km)

Maximum installation strain (N)

4/8

6.4

140

1,250

Construction of horizontal and vertical connections both inside and outside.

Supported applications • 10GBASE-LX4; • 1000BASE-SX and LX; • 100BASE-FX; • 10BASE; • FOIRL; • FDDI PDM; • fibre channel (FC-PH) at 133/266/531/1062 Mbps • 52/155/1200 Mbps ATM; • 4/16 Mbps Token Ring; • all the other supported applications for category OM2.

Optical characteristics and performance Passband (MHz x km)

Maximum link length for 1 Gbit/s (m)

Maximum attenuation (dB/km)

850 nm

1300 nm

850 nm

1300 nm

850 nm

1300 nm

500

550

2.4

0.6

Technical specifications • Internal or external use; • loose multimode cables 50/125 µm; • cables in category OM2; • 4 or 8 fibres; • anti-rodent protection in fibreglass; • external coating: LSZH; • available in coils of 500 or 2000 m, with the possibility of cutting to size (minimum 100 m). For information on cutting to size, please contact our Sales Network.

Conformity to Standards Standards ANSIA/TIA/EIA 568 C, ISO/IEC 11801, CEI EN 50173.

Fibre optic patch cords Field of application • internal use (ambient category 1) for: - connection to work station; - devices for communications rooms; - connection to electronic devices; - cross connection.

Technical specifications • Factory terminated and tested to industry standards to ensure reliability and safety; • High quality ceramic ferrule: ensures low insertion loss.

Conformity to Standards ANSIA/TIA/EIA 568 C, ISO/IEC 11801, CEI EN 50173; Bellcore GR-326-SET generic requirements; IEC 60874 standards for connectors for fibre optic cables.

208

Max loss, after the 0.75 dB test Type of test

Condition

Low temperature (FOTP-188)

-10 °C, 4 days

Life test (FOTP-4)

60 °C, 4 days

Humidity (FOTP-5)

90 - 95°C at 40°C

Impact (FOTP-2)

8 falls from 1.5 m

Strength of coupling mechanism (FOTP-185)

33 N at 0° for 5 s

Durability (FOTP-21)

500 cycles

Cable retention (FOTP-6)

90 N at 0° for 5 s

Flexibility (FOTP-1)

0.5 kg at 25 cm, from +90° to -90°, 100 cycles

Twist (FOTP-36)

15 N at 0°. 5 twists, 10 cycles

NETSAFE Fibre-optic cables and patch cords Fibre-optic cables 03150.1 03150.2 03151.1 03151.2

Loose multimode fibre optic cable 50/125 µm with 4 fibres, with LSZH jacket - 500 m coil Loose multimode fibre optic cable 50/125 µm with 4 fibres, with LSZH jacket - 2000 m coil Loose multimode fibre optic cable 50/125 µm with 8 fibres, with LSZH jacket - 500 m coil Loose multimode fibre optic cable 50/125 µm with 8 fibres, with LSZH jacket - 2000 m coil

03150.1 03150.2

03151.1 03151.2

Fibre optic patch cords 62.5 µm 03110.SC

SC patch cord, multimode fibre optic cable 62.5/125 µm duplex - 2 m

03110.SC

Fibre optic patch cords 50 µm 03111.SC

SC patch cord, multimode fibre optic cable 50/125 µm duplex - 2 m

03111.SC

Fibre optic patch cords 50 µm

NETSAFE

03111.LC LC patch cord, multimode fibre optic cable 50/125 µm duplex - 2 m 03111.SC.LC SC/LC patch cord, multimode fibre optic cable 50/125 µm duplex - 2 m

03111.LC

Fibre optic trays, optical adaptors and connectors, from page 206

03111.SC.LC

209

NETSAFE Fibre optic trays, optical adaptors and connectors Fibre optic trays

Technical specifications • Low profile design: only takes up the space of one rack unit (1.75 "-1U); • front panel that slides out to facilitate connecting the optical fibre, even with the fibre optic tray installed on the rack; • depth-adjustable to ensure the minimum radius of curvature for the fibre; • ready for ST optical adaptors: - 03124.ST.E - max. 24 connectors; • ready for SC and LC optical adaptors: - 03124.SC.E - max. 24 connectors; • with accessories for fibre management inside the tray.

Conformity to Standards

44,4 mm 1 unità rack

• Racks or cabinets (19”); • Backbone terminations in telecommunications cabinets or in the main distribution rooms.

222 mm

484 mm - 19”

03124.ST.E

435 mm

44,4 mm 1 unità rack

Field of application

435 mm

222 mm

484 mm - 19”

03124.SC.E

Standards ANSIA/TIA/EIA 568 C, ISO/IEC 11801, CEI EN 50173.

Connectors for fibre-optic cables

03105.SC, 03106.SC

Field of application

Antidust cover Cappuccio antipolvere

• Patch panels; • Splitters; • Terminations to the devices; • Cable joints and/or repairs.

Adattatore manicotto Adapter for per sleeve Manicott a crimpare Crimpingosleeve Sheath di protezione Guaina

Technical specifications • No polishing required; • Does not use epoxy resins and the associated crystallization oven; • Does not require electrical equipment; • Pre-connected ceramic ferrule: ensures contact with the optical fibres, lengthens lifespan, provides high performance; • Interconnection compatibility: SC or ST connectors; • For fibres 50/125 mm or 62.5/125 mm; • Estimated time for assembly on site: - approximately 1 minute for 900 µm; - approximately 3 minutes for fibres with protective sheath; • Insertion loss 0.3 dB (typical); • Lifespan: <0.2 dB in change (500 cycles); • storage temperature: from -40°C to 65°C; • ultimate strength (tensile strength): 6.7.N; • ceramic ferrule; • reflection factor: -30 dB (typical).

Conformity to Standards Standards ANSIA/TIA/EIA 568 C, ISO/IEC 11801, CEI EN 50173.

210

Corpo del Connector connett ore unit

Cappuccio Antidust cover antipolvere

03106.ST Cappuccio antipolvere Antidust cover Corpo del connettore Connector unit Antidust cover Cappuccio antipolvere

Alloggiamento posteriore Guaina Sheath di protezione

NETSAFE Fibre optic trays, optical adaptors and connectors Fibre optic trays 03124.ST.E 03124.SC.E

19 in fibre optic tray ready for 24 optical adaptors for ST connectors, removable front panel - 1 rack unit 19 in fibre optic tray ready for 24 optical adaptors for SC or LC connectors, removable front panel - 1 rack unit

03124.ST.E

03124.SC.E

Optical adaptors for fibre optic trays 03101.ST 03101.SC 03101.LC

ST optical adaptor for fibre optic trays 03124.ST.E SC optical adaptor for fibre optic trays 03124.SC.E LC optical adaptor for fibre optic trays 03124.SC.E

03101.ST

03101.SC

03101.LC

Connectors for fibre-optic cables 03105.SC

Connector for multimode fibre-optic cable 62.5/125 µm, type SC

03105.SC

Connectors for fibre-optic cables Connector for multimode fibre-optic cable 50/125 µm, type SC Connector for multimode fibre-optic cable 50/125 µm, type ST NETSAFE

03106.SC 03106.ST

03106.SC

Fibre-optic cables and patch cords, from page 208

03106.ST

211

NETSAFE Surface mounting cabinets and accessories Surface mounting cabinets

Surface mounting cabinet 03209.3 with hinged opening kit 03209.3L

Field of application Dedicated metalwork for housing the active and passive components in local area networks.

Technical specifications • Colour: RAL 7035; • number and dimensions of cable inlet holes: 2 holes 20x6 cm, one on the top and one on the bottom with guillotine; • possibility of hinge opening in 9, 12 and 15 rack unit versions, by using the dedicated kit (equipped with unified key lock); • number of risers: 2 (adjustable in depth); • fitted for mounting 1 ventilation kit 03256; • transparent tempered glass doors, reversible, with locks; • locks with unified keys; • removable side panels; • fully removable; • protection class IP20.

Conformity to Standards IEC 297-1- Distance between holes; EN 60529 - Protection class; UNI EN 12150-1: 2001 - Glass fragmentation test; UNI EN 1288-3 - Tempered glass. 420 mm 600 mm

420 mm

501 mm

768 mm

600 mm

420 mm

03209.3

03215.3

373 mm

635 mm

600 mm

420 mm

03206.3

03212.3 100 mm 600 mm 100 mm 600 mm 100 mm

03209.3L

212

03212.3L

768 mm

635 mm

501 mm

600 mm

03215.3L

NETSAFE Surface mounting cabinets and accessories Surface mounting cabinet 600x420x373 mm 03206.3 03206.3P

Surface mounting cabinet for installation of 19 in panels up to 6 rack units, RAL 7035. Dimensions 600x420x373 mm; weight 16 kg Spare door for enclosure 03206.3

03206.3

03206.3P

Surface mounting cabinet 600x420x501 mm 03209.3 03209.3P 03209.3L

Surface mounting cabinet for installation of 19" panels up to 6 rack units, RAL 7035. Dimensions 600x420x373 mm; weight 20 kg Spare door for enclosure 03209.3 Hinged opening kit for enclosure 03209.3; weight 8 kg

03209.3

03209.3L

Surface mounting cabinet 600x420x635 mm 03212.3 03212.3P 03212.3L

Surface mounting cabinet for installation of 19" panels up to 12 rack units, RAL 7035. Dimensions 600x420x635 mm; weight 23 kg Spare door for enclosure 03212.3 Hinged opening kit for enclosure 03212.3; weight 10 kg

03212.3

03212.3L

03215.3 03215.3P 03215.3L

Surface mounting cabinet for installation of 19" panels up to 15 rack units, RAL 7035. Dimensions 600x420x768 mm; weight 27 kg Spare door for enclosure 03215.3 Hinged opening kit for enclosure 03215.3; weight 11 kg

03215.3 Patch panels, from page 204 - Fibre optic trays, from page 210

03215.3L

213

NETSAFE

Surface mounting cabinet 600x420x768 mm

NETSAFE Cabinets and accessories Cabinets Field of application

Other characteristics of the cabinet 03245.3 800x1000:

Dedicated metalwork for housing the active and passive components in local area networks (LAN).

• Large louvres on the sides; • Max distance between the front and rear risers: 950 mm; • max permissible load: 350 kg; • roll-over limit: max 100 kg with centre of gravity outside the cabinet up to 280 mm; • fitted for mounting 6 ventilation kit 03256; • ready for the installation of 2 power panels (art. 03260, 03261, 03262) in the two cross-beams located on the bottom of the cabinet.

Technical specifications • Colour: RAL 7035; • number and dimensions of cable inlet holes: 2 holes 30x10 cm, one on the top and one on the bottom with guillotine; • number of risers: 4 (adjustable in depth); • ready for fitting the wheels kit 03224.3R or 03245.3R (after removing the spacing base); • fitted for mounting 6 ventilation kit 03256; • transparent tempered glass front door, reversible, with handle and lock; • removable side doors with locks; • reversible rear door with lock; • fully removable; • protection class IP20.

Conformity to Standards IEC 297-1- Distance between holes; EN 60529 - Protection class; UNI EN 12150-1: 2001 - Glass fragmentation test; UNI EN 1288-3 - Tempered glass.

Dimensions 800 mm 640 mm

1000 mm

640 mm

2114 mm

640 mm

1359 mm

2114 mm

640 mm

800 mm

03224.3

214

03242.3

03243.3

03245.3

NETSAFE Cabinets and accessories Cabinet 640x640x1359 mm and 640x640x2114 mm 03224.3 03224.3P 03242.3 03242.3P

Cabinet for installation of 19" panels up to 25 rack units, RAL 7035. Dimensions 640x640x1359 mm; weight 70 kg Spare door for cabinet 03224.3 Cabinet for installation of 19" panels up to 42 rack units, RAL 7035. Dimensions 640x640x2114 mm; weight 110 kg Spare door for cabinet 03242.3

03224.3

03224.3P

03242.3

03242.3P

Cabinet 800x800x2114 mm and 800x1000x2114 mm Cabinet for installation of 19" panels up to 42 rack units, RAL 7035. Dimensions 800x800x2114 mm; weight 130 kg Cabinet for installation of 19" panels up to 42 rack units, RAL 7035. Dimensions 800x1000x2114 mm; weight 195 kg Spare door for cabinets 03243.3 and 03245.3

NETSAFE

03243.3 03245.3 03245.3P

03243.3

Patch panels, from page 204 - Fibre optic trays, from page 210

03245.3

03245.3P

215

NETSAFE Accessories for cabinets and enclosures Accessories for cabinets 03204.2U 03204.1U

Removable shelf, depth 450 mm - 2 rack units. Maximum permissible load 20 kg 19" fixed shelf, depth 700 mm - 2 rack units. Maximum permissible load 100 kg

459,5 mm

03204.2U

62 mm

89 mm 2 unità rack

482 mm - 19”

705 mm

482 mm - 19”

89 mm 2 unità rack

03204.1U

Accessories for cabinets 03251 03204.1UM

Set of vertical cable guide rings for cabinets Telescopic rails for fixed shelf 03204.1U. Maximum permissible load 50 kg

03251

19 mm

53 mm

510 mm

03204.1UM

216

NETSAFE Accessories for cabinets and enclosures Set of wheels for cabinets 03224.3R 03245.3R

Set of wheels for cabinets 03224.3, 03242.3 and 03243.3 Set of wheels for cabinets 03245.3

03224.3R

03245.3R

Spare accessories 03258.3 03259.3

Spare lock with 2 keys, made of metal for enclosures 03206.3, 03209.3, 03212.3 and 03215.3 Spare handle with 2 keys, for cabinets 03224.3, 03242.3, 03243.3 and 03245.3

NETSAFE

03258.3

03259.3

Cabinets, from page 214

217

NETSAFE Accessories for cabinets and enclosures Technical specifications

Fibre optic tools and accessories kit The set of tools and accessories for terminating Netsafe 03255 fibre optics contains all the necessary tools for fibre optic termination. Packaged in a handy carrying case, it also contains a CD/R for practice and the installation guide for SC and ST connectors.

• Fast fibre terminating; • fibre terminating directly on site; • terminating possible at any temperature; • no polishing required; • does not require using resins nor their oven for crystallization, thus no toxic materials are handled and it is not necessary to issue any specific documentation.

03255 - Contents of the Kit

Clamp for fixing termination tool

Tool for terminating the connector

Microscope

Crimping pliers

Pliers for removing outer sheath

Pliers for removing outer sheath on 125 fibres

Fibre cutting tool

Tweezers

Waste container

Marker pen

Calibrated templates

Manuals with instructions for terminating

Dimensions 60 mm

89 mm 2 unità rack

44,4 mm 1 unità rack

03200.1A

482 mm - 19”

03200.1U

03200.2U

482 mm - 19” 482 mm - 19”

44,4 mm 1 unità rack

89 mm 2 unità rack

133,3 mm 3 unità rack

482 mm - 19”

03201.1U

03201.2U

03201.3U

380 mm 250 mm

218

482 mm - 19”

03203.2U

89 mm 2 unità rack

03202.2U

89 mm 2 unità rack

482 mm - 19”

60 mm

NETSAFE Accessories for cabinets and enclosures Accessories for surface mounting cabinets and enclosures 03200.1A 03200.1U 03200.2U

19" panel with open cable outlet - 1 rack unit 19" panel with cable outlet - 1 rack unit 19" panel with cable outlet - 2 rack units

03200.1A

03200.1U

03200.2U

Accessories for surface mounting cabinets and enclosures 03201.1U 03201.2U 03201.3U

19" blind panel - 1 rack unit 19" blind panel - 2 rack units 19" blind panel - 3 rack units

03201.1U

03201.2U

03201.3U

Accessories for surface mounting cabinets and enclosures 03202.2U 03203.2U 03256 03257

19" mounting frame for live devices, depth 38 cm - 2 rack units 19" mounting frame for live devices, depth 25 cm - 2 rack units Fan 230 V~ 50-60 Hz for surface mounting cabinet and enclosures, complete with protective grille and power cable with plug 2P+E 16 A 250 V~ combined German and French standard Metal screw and cage nut for fixing 19" panels in the surface mounting cabinets and enclosures

03256

03257

03202.2U

Accessories for surface mounting cabinets and enclosures Tool for terminating the twisted cable on insulation-piercing terminals type 110 Set of tools and accessories for installing connectors for SC and ST type fibre optic cables NETSAFE

03250 03255

03250 Surface mounting cabinets and enclosures, from page 212

03255

219

NETSAFE 10” S.O.H.O. system 10" surface mounting cabinets Field of application Creation of structured cabling systems in the Small Office and Home Office segment.

Technical specifications • 10" enclosure size 8 rack units able to hold: - patch panels Cat. 5e UTP, 12 RJ45 sockets; - patch panels Cat. 6 UTP, 12 RJ45 sockets; - blank patch panels to be completed with RJ45 sockets (up to 8); - cable outlet panels; - blind panels; - mounting frames for live devices; • colour RAL 7035; • two 9x5 cm guillotine openings for cable entry, one on the top and one on the bottom; • fully removable; • number of risers: 2 (adjustable in depth); • removable side doors; • reversible front door with lock.

Dimensions 257,5 mm

400 mm

350 mm

44,5 mm 1 unità rack

47 mm

03303.1

03303.3

44,4 mm 1 unità rack

03303.E

254 mm - 10”

10,5 mm

03301.1A

03301.1U

220

254 mm - 10 “

254 mm - 10”

44,4 mm 1 unità rack

60 mm

44,5 mm 1 unità rack

44,4 mm 1 unità rack

03308

150 mm

03302.1U

254 mm - 10”

NETSAFE 10” S.O.H.O. system 10" surface mounting cabinet 03308

Surface mounting cabinet for installation of 10" panels up to 8 rack units, RAL 7035. Dimensions 350x258x400 mm; weight 8 kg

03308

Patch panels 03303.E 03303.1 03303.3

10" patch panel with 8 empty ports - 1 rack unit 10” patch panel complete with 12 RJ45 connectors Cat. 5e unshielded, T568A/B universal wiring, 8 contacts, insulation-piercing terminals type 110 - 1 rack unit 10” patch panel complete with 12 RJ45 connectors Cat. 6 unshielded, T568A/B universal wiring, 8 contacts, insulation-piercing terminals type 110 - 1 rack unit

03303.E

03303.1

03303.3

Accessories 10" panel open cable outlet - 1 rack unit 10" blind panel - 1 rack units 10" mounting frame for live devices, depth 15 cm - 1 rack units

03301.1A

03301.1U

NETSAFE

03301.1A 03301.1U 03302.1U

03302.1U

221

NETSAFE Power panels Power panels

Pilot light - replacing the lamp

Field of application Electrical power socket outlets inside surface mounting cabinets and/or enclosures.

03260 - Technical specifications • 7 universal SICURY socket outlets 2P+E 16 A 250 V~ for: - 2P 2.5 A Europlugs; - 2P and 2P+E Italian standard 10 A and 16 A 250 V~ plugs; - 2P+E 16 A 250 V~ German standard plugs; - 2P American standard flat pin 15 A 125 V~ non-polarised plugs; • cable: 3 m 3G1.5 mm2 with 2P+E 16 A 250 V~ plug Italian standard S17 (non-removable); • dimensions: 19” x 2 rack units.

Conformity to Standards LV directive CEI 23-50 (IEC 60884-1).

Circuit breaker Current-time tripping diagram

03261 - Technical specifications 300 200 100 80 60

Thermal tripping Zona di intervento areatermico with cold start a freddo

MINUTES MINUTI

20 10 8 6 4 2 1

SECONDS SECONDI

• 6 universal SICURY socket outlets 2P+E 16 A 250 V~ for: - 2P 2.5 A Europlugs; - 2P and 2P+E Italian standard 10 A and 16 A 250 V~ plugs; - 2P+E 16 A 250 V~ German standard plugs; - 2P American standard flat pin 15 A 125 V~ non-polarised plugs; • cable: 3 m 3G1.5 mm2 with 2P+E 16 A 250 V~ plug Italian standard S17 (non-removable); • 2P 16 AX 250 V~ switch; • pilot light with red diffuser for microtube lamp: - 07052: neon lamp 250 V~ 0.5 W ø 6.3x28 mm, red; • dimensions: 19” x 2 rack units.

40 20 10 8 6 4 2 1 0,8 0,6

Electromagnetic Zona di intervento tripping area elettromagnetico

0,4

Conformity to Standards

0,2

LV directive CEI 23-50 (IEC 60884-1), EN 62094-1, EN 60669-1.

0,1 0,08 0,06 0,04 0,02 0,01

1 1.1 1.2

03262 - Technical specifications • 6 universal SICURY socket outlets 2P+E 16 A 250 V~ for: - 2P 2.5 A Europlugs; - 2P and 2P+E Italian standard 10 A and 16 A 250 V~ plugs; - 2P+E 16 A 250 V~ German standard plugs; - 2P American standard flat pin 15 A 125 V~ non-polarised plugs; • cable: 3 m 3G1.5 mm2 with 2P+E 16 A 250 V~ plug Italian standard S17 (non-removable); • circuit breaker 1P+N C 16 120-230 V~ 50-60 Hz, p.i. 3000 A; • pilot light with red diffuser for microtube lamp: - 07052: neon lamp 250 V~ 0.5 W ø 6.3x28 mm, red; • dimensions: 19” x 2 rack units.

Conformity to Standards LV directive CEI 23-50 (IEC 60884-1), EN 62094-1, EN 60898-1.

222

1.5

2.5

MULTIPLES OFCORRENTE RATED CURRENT In In MULTIPLI DELLA NOMINALE

10 11 12

NETSAFE Power panels Power panel 03260

19" panel complete with: • 7 SICURY outlets 2P+E 16 A 250 V~ universal, for Europlugs 2P 2.5 A, plugs 2P and 2P+E 10 A and 16 A Italian standard, plugs 2P+E 16 A 250 V~ German standard, plugs 2P 15 A 125 V~ American standard flat pin, non-polarised. Do not make the earth connection with the 2P+E 16 A 250 V~ French standard plug

• 3 m cable 3G1.5 mm2 and plug S17

03260

Power panel 03261

19" panel complete with: • 6 SICURY outlets 2P+E 16 A 250 V~ universal, for Europlugs 2P 2.5 A, plugs 2P and 2P+E 10 A and 16 A Italian standard, plugs 2P+E 16 A 250 V~ German standard, plugs 2P 15 A 125 V~ American standard flat pin, non-polarised. Do not make the earth connection with the 2P+E 16 A 250 V~ French standard plug.

• 2P switch • pilot light • 3 m cable 3G1.5 mm2 and plug S17.

03261

Power panel 03262

19" panel complete with: • 6 UNIVERSAL SICURY outlets 2P+E 16 A 250 V~, for Europlugs 2P 2.5 A, plugs 2P and 2P+E 10 A and 16 A Italian standard, plugs 2P+E 16 A 250 V~ German standard, plugs 2P 15 A 125 V~ American standard flat pin, non-polarised. Do not make the earth connection with the 2P+E 16 A 250 V~ French standard plug.

NETSAFE

• circuit breaker 1P+N C 16 • pilot light • 3 m cable 3G1.5 mm2 and plug S17

03262

Surface mounting cabinets and enclosures, from page 212

223

B.C15007 EN 1501

Viale Vicenza, 14 36063 Marostica VI - Italy Tel. +39 0424 488 600 Fax +39 0424 488 709 www.vimar.com